484422
12
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/322
Pagina verder
VOLVO V50
Owners Manual Web Edition
DEAR VOLVO OWNER
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo.
The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your
passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo
has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental
requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that
you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and mainte-
nance information contained in this owner's manual.
Table of contents
2
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
00
00 Introduction
Important information................................. 8
Volvo and the environment....................... 12
01
01 Safety
Seatbelts................................................... 16
Airbag system........................................... 19
Airbags...................................................... 20
Activating/deactivating the airbag*........... 22
Side airbags (SIPS bags).......................... 24
Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 26
WHIPS....................................................... 27
When the systems deploy......................... 29
Crash mode.............................................. 30
Child safety............................................... 31
02
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive cars.................. 46
Overview, right-hand drive cars................ 48
Driver's door control panel....................... 50
Combined instrument panel...................... 51
Indicator and warning symbols................. 52
Information display................................... 56
Electrical socket........................................ 58
Lighting panel........................................... 60
Left-hand stalk switch............................... 64
Right-hand stalk switch............................ 67
Cruise control*.......................................... 70
Keypad in the steering wheel*.................. 72
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warn-
ing flashers................................................ 73
Parking brake............................................ 74
Power windows......................................... 75
Windows, rearview and door mirrors........ 77
Power sunroof* ........................................ 81
Personal preferences................................ 83
HomeLink
*.............................................. 86
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3
03
03 Climate control
General information on climate control..... 92
Manual climate control, AC....................... 94
Electronic climate control, ECC*............... 97
Air distribution......................................... 100
Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas-
senger compartment heater*.................. 101
Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)....... 104
04
04 Interior
Front seats.............................................. 108
Interior lighting........................................ 111
Storage spaces in the passenger com-
partment.................................................. 114
Rear seat................................................. 118
Cargo area.............................................. 120
05
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade......... 126
Active locks............................................. 129
Keyless drive*.......................................... 130
Battery in remote control key.................. 133
Locking and unlocking............................ 134
Child safety locks.................................... 137
Alarm*..................................................... 138
Table of contents
4
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06
06 Starting and driving
General.................................................... 144
Refuelling................................................ 146
Alcolock*................................................. 150
Starting the engine.................................. 154
Starting the engine – Flexifuel................. 156
Keyless drive*.......................................... 158
Manual gearbox...................................... 159
Automatic gearbox.................................. 160
DRIVe Start-Stop*................................... 165
Brake system.......................................... 169
DSTC – Stability and traction control sys-
tem*......................................................... 171
Park Assist*............................................. 173
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System. . 175
Towing and recovery.............................. 178
Start assistance...................................... 181
Driving with a trailer................................ 182
Towing equipment*................................. 184
Detachable towbar* ............................... 186
Loading................................................... 190
Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 191
07
07 Wheels and tyres
General.................................................... 194
Tyre pressure.......................................... 198
Warning triangle* and spare wheel * ...... 199
Changing wheels.................................... 201
Emergency puncture repair*................... 203
08
08 Car care
Cleaning.................................................. 210
Touching up paintwork........................... 214
Rustproofing........................................... 215
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
5
09
09 Maintenance and service
Volvo service........................................... 218
Self-maintenance.................................... 219
Bonnet and engine compartment........... 220
Oils and fluids......................................... 222
Wiper blades........................................... 228
Battery..................................................... 230
Replacing bulbs...................................... 234
Fuses...................................................... 241
10
10 Infotainment system
General.................................................... 252
Audio functions....................................... 254
Radio functions....................................... 259
CD functions........................................... 264
Menu structure – audio system.............. 267
Phone functions*..................................... 268
Menu structure – phone*......................... 275
Bluetooth handsfree*.............................. 278
11
11 Specifications
Type designation..................................... 286
Dimensions and weights......................... 288
Engine specifications.............................. 291
Engine oil................................................ 292
Fluids and lubricants............................... 294
Fuel......................................................... 297
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pres-
sure ........................................................ 299
Electrical system..................................... 301
Type approval......................................... 303
Symbols in the display............................ 304
Table of contents
6
12
12 Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index.................................. 308
Table of contents
7
Introduction
Important information
8
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Reading the Owner's Manual
Introduction
A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey. This will give you the opportunity
to familiarise yourself with new functions, to
see how best to handle the car in different sit-
uations, and to make the best use of all the
car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the manual.
The specifications, design features and illus-
trations in this owner's manual are not binding.
We reserve the right to make modifications
without prior notice.
©
Volvo Car Corporation
Option
All types of option/accessory are marked with
an asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, this manual
also describes options (factory fitted equip-
ment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra
equipment).
The equipment described in the owner's man-
ual is not available in all cars - they have dif-
ferent equipment depending on adaptations
for the needs of different markets and national
or local laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is stand-
ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo
dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts advise of a risk of personal
injury.
IMPORTANT
Important texts advise of a risk of material
damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of features and functions for exam-
ple.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner's
manual that is located at the bottom of the
page. This information is an addition to the text
that it refers to via a number. If the footnote
refers to text in a table then letters are used
instead of numbers for referral.
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show text
messages. These text messages are high-
lighted in the owner's manual by means of the
text being slightly larger and printed in grey.
Examples of this are in menu texts and mes-
sage texts on the information display (e.g.
AUDIO SETTINGS).
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information
in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the
car have the following descending degree of
importance for the warning/information.
Warning for personal injury
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field. Used
to indicate the presence of danger which, if the
Introduction
Important information
9
warning is ignored, may result in serious per-
sonal injury or fatality.
Risk of property damage
G031592
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger which,
if the warning is ignored, may result in damage
to property.
Information
G031593
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual are
not provided as exact reproductions of
those in the car. The purpose is to show
their approximate appearance and location
in the car. The information that applies to
your car in particular is available on the label
in question in your car.
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a
certain sequence are numbered in the owner's
manual.
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is
numbered in the same way as the corres-
ponding illustration.
There are numbered lists with letters adja-
cent to the series of illustrations where the
order of the instructions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnum-
bered and are used to illustrate a move-
ment.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-
step instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used
in overview images where different com-
ponents are pointed out. The number
recurs in the position list featured in con-
nection with the illustration that describes
the item.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
Introduction
Important information
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Coolant
Engine oil
To be continued
`
``
This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when a section continues on the following
page.
Recording data
Your vehicle contains a number of computers
whose function is to continuously check and
monitor the vehicle's operation and function-
ality. Some of the computers can record infor-
mation during normal driving if they detect an
error. In addition, information is recorded in the
event of a crash or incident. Parts of the recor-
ded information are required so that techni-
cians can diagnose and rectify faults in the
vehicle during servicing and maintenance and
so that Volvo can fulfil legal requirements and
other regulations. In addition to this, the infor-
mation is used for research purposes by Volvo
in order to continually develop quality and
safety, as the information can contribute to a
better understanding of the factors that cause
accidents and injuries. The information
includes details of the status and functionality
of various systems and modules in the vehicle
with regard to engine, throttle, steering and
brake systems, amongst other things. This
information may include details regarding the
way the driver drives the vehicle, such as vehi-
cle speed, brake and accelerator pedal use,
steering wheel movement and whether or not
the driver and passengers have used their
seatbelts. For the reasons given this informa-
tion may be stored in the vehicle's computers
for a certain length of time, but also as a result
of a collision or incident. This information may
be stored by Volvo as long as it can help to
further develop and further enhance safety and
quality and as long as there are legal require-
ments and other regulations that Volvo needs
to consider.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri-
bed information being disclosed to third parties
without the vehicle owner's consent. However,
due to national legislation and regulations
Volvo may be required to disclose such infor-
mation to authorities such as police authorities,
or others who may assert a legal right to have
access to it.
To be able to read and interpret the information
recorded by the computers in the vehicle
requires special technical equipment that
Volvo, and workshops that have entered into
agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo
is responsible that the information, which is
transferred to Volvo during servicing and main-
tenance, is stored and handled in a secure
manner and that the handling complies with
applicable legal requirements. For further infor-
mation - contact a Volvo dealer.
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories can negatively affect the car's
electrical system. Certain accessories only
function when their associated software is
installed in the car's computer system. We
therefore recommend that you always contact
an authorised Volvo workshop before installing
accessories which are connected to or affect
the electrical system.
Change of ownership for cars with
Volvo On Call *
Volvo On Call is a supplemental service that
consists of safety, security and comfort serv-
ices. If the car has Volvo On Call and there is a
change of owner, it is very important that these
services are discontinued so that the former
owner cannot access the services in the car.
Contact the call centre by pressing the ON
CALL button in the car or contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop. See also "Changing the
security code" in the owner's manual for Volvo
On Call.
Introduction
Important information
11
Information on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further infor-
mation concerning your car.
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
12
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
G000000
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-
ration's core values which influence all opera-
tions. We also believe that our customers share
our consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict international
environmental standards and is also manufac-
tured in one of the cleanest and most resource-
efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo-
ration has global ISO certification, which
includes the environmental standard ISO
14001 covering all factories and several of our
other units. We also set requirements for our
partners so that they work systematically with
environmental issues.
Fuel consumption
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption
in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel
consumption generally results in lower emis-
sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con-
sumption. For more information read under the
heading, Reducing environmental impact.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the con-
cept "Clean inside and out" – a concept that
encompasses a clean interior environment as
well as highly efficient emission control. In
many cases the exhaust emissions are well
below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger com-
partment via the air intake.
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte-
rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom-
ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out-
side.
The system consists of an electronic sensor
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-
tored continuously and if there is an increase in
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
13
the level of certain unhealthy gases such as
carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone
and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon
filter.
Interior
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea-
sant and comfortable, even for people with
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.
Extreme attention has been given to choosing
environmentally-compatible materials.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consumption
for your car. In this way you contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and mainte-
nance of your car it becomes part of our sys-
tem. We make clear demands regarding the
way in which our workshops are designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. Our workshop staff have the
knowledge and the tools required to guarantee
good environmental care.
Reducing environmental impact
You can easily help reduce environmental
impact - here are a few tips:
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the
engine when stationary for longer periods.
Pay attention to local regulations.
Drive economically - think ahead.
Perform service and maintenance in
accordance with the owner's manual's
instructions - follow the Service and War-
ranty Booklet's recommended intervals.
If the car is equipped with an engine block
heater*, use it before starting from cold - it
improves starting capacity and reduces
wear in cold weather and the engine rea-
ches normal operating temperature more
quickly, which lowers consumption and
reduces emissions.
High speed increases consumption con-
siderably due to increased wind resistance
- a doubling of speed increases wind resis-
tance 4 times.
Always dispose of environmentally hazar-
dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult a
workshop in the event of uncertainty about
how this type of waste should be discarded
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Following this advice can save money, the
planet's resources are saved, and the car's
durability is extended. For more information
and further advice, see the pages 144 and
297.
Recycling
As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is
important that the car is recycled in an envi-
ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car
is therefore requested to contact a dealer for
referral to a certified/approved recycling
facility.
The owner's manual and the
environment
The Forest Stewardship Council
symbol
shows that the paper pulp in this publication
comes from FSC
certified forests or other
controlled sources.
14
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Seatbelts................................................................................................. 16
Airbag system......................................................................................... 19
Airbags.................................................................................................... 20
Activating/deactivating the airbag*......................................................... 22
Side airbags (SIPS bags)........................................................................ 24
Inflatable Curtain (IC).............................................................................. 26
WHIPS..................................................................................................... 27
When the systems deploy....................................................................... 29
Crash mode............................................................................................ 30
Child safety............................................................................................. 31
SAFETY
01 Safety
Seatbelts
01
16
General information
G020104
Tensioning the hip strap. The belt must be posi-
tioned low down.
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all
passengers use their seatbelts. It is important
that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can
provide maximum protection. Do not lean the
backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed
to protect in a normal seating position.
Putting on a seatbelt
Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it by
pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud
"click" indicates that the seatbelt has
locked.
Releasing the seatbelt
Press the red lock button and then let the
seatbelt retract. If the seatbelt does not
retract fully, feed the seatbelt in by hand so
that it does not hang loose.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be with-
drawn:
if it is pulled out too quickly
during braking and acceleration
if the car leans heavily.
Keep in mind the following
do not use clips or anything else that can
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly
ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or
caught on anything
the hip strap must be positioned low down
(not over the abdomen)
tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling
the diagonal shoulder belt as illustrated.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by the
airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one per-
son.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelt yourself.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop. If the seatbelt
has been subjected to a major load, such as
in conjunction with a collision, the entire
seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the
seatbelt's protective properties may have
been lost even if the seatbelt does not
appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be
replaced if it shows signs of wear or dam-
age. The new seatbelt must be type-
approved and designed for installation at
the same location as the replaced seatbelt.
01 Safety
Seatbelts
01
``
17
Seatbelts and pregnancy
G020105
The seatbelt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
correct way. The diagonal section of the seat-
belt should wrap over the shoulder then be
routed between the breasts and to the side of
the abdomen.
The lap section of the seatbelt should lay flat
over the thighs and as low as possible under
the abdomen. – It must never be allowed to ride
upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt
and ensure that it fits as close to the body as
possible. In addition, check that there are no
twists in the seatbelt.
As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means that they
must be able to easily operate the foot pedals
and steering wheel). They should strive to posi-
tion the seat with as large a distance as possi-
ble between their abdomen and the steering
wheel.
Seatbelt reminder
G018084
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten
their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual
reminder. The audio reminder is speed
dependent, and in some cases time depend-
ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof
console and the combined instrument panel.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
Provides information on which seatbelts
are being used in the rear seat. A message
appears in the information display when
the seatbelts are in use, or if one of the rear
doors has been opened. The message is
cleared automatically after driving for
approximately 30 seconds or after press-
ing the indicator stalk's READ button.
Provides a warning if one of the rear seat-
belts is unfastened during a journey. This
warning takes the form of a message on
the information display along with the
audio/visual signal. The warning ceases
when the seatbelt is re-fastened or when
acknowledged manually by pressing the
READ button.
The message on the information display show-
ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail-
able. Press the READ button to see stored
messages.
Certain markets
An audio signal and indicator lamp remind the
driver if not wearing a seatbelt to use one. At
low speed, the audio reminder will sound for
the first 6 seconds.
01 Safety
Seatbelts
01
18
Seatbelt tensioner
The front seatbelts and the two for the outer
rear seats are equipped with seatbelt tension-
ers. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner
tightens the seatbelt in the event of a suffi-
ciently violent collision. The seatbelt then pro-
vides more effective restraint for occupants.
WARNING
Never insert the tongue of the passenger's
seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side.
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. Do not make
any damages on seatbelts nor insert any
foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts
and buckles would then possibly not func-
tion as intended in the event of a collision.
There is a risk of serous injury.
01 Safety
Airbag system
01
19
Warning symbol on the combined
instrument panel
The warning symbol in the combined instru-
ment panel illuminates when the remote con-
trol key is turned to key position I, II or III. The
symbol goes out after approx. 6 seconds pro-
vided the airbag system is fault-free.
As well as the warning symbol, a
message may appear on the dis-
play in appropriate cases. If the
warning symbol malfunctions, the
warning triangle illuminates and
the message
SRS AIRBAG
SERVICE REQUIRED
or SRS
AIRBAG SERVICE URGENT
appears in the display. Volvo rec-
ommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop immediately.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag system
remains illuminated or illuminates while driv-
ing, it means that the airbag system does
not have full functionality. The symbol indi-
cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys-
tem, SIPS, SRS or the IC system. Volvo rec-
ommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop immediately.
01 Safety
Airbags
01
20
Airbag system
G020111
SRS system, left-hand drive
The system consists of airbags and sensors. A
sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot gas. To
cushion the impact, the airbag deflates when
compressed. When this occurs, smoke
escapes into the car. This is completely nor-
mal. The entire process, including inflation and
deflation of the airbag, takes place within
tenths of a second.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious per-
sonal injury.
G020110
SRS system, right-hand drive
NOTE
The sensors react differently depending on
the course of the collision and whether or
not the seatbelts on the driver's side and
passenger side are used.
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli-
sion. The airbag system senses the force of
the collision on the car and adapts accord-
ingly so that one or more airbags is
deployed.
The capacities of the airbags are also adap-
ted to the collision force to which they are
subjected.
01 Safety
Airbags
01
21
G020113
Location of the passenger airbag in left-hand drive
and right-hand drive cars.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
instrument panel where the passenger air-
bag is located.
Airbag on the driver's side
The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-
tection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver's
side. It is folded up into the centre of the steer-
ing wheel. The steering wheel is marked SRS
AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by the
airbag in the event of a collision.
Passenger airbag
The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-
tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen-
ger side. It is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. The cover panel is marked
SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and back
against the backrest. Seatbelts must be
secured.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated.
1
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat. Children under
140 cm must never sit in the front passenger
seat if the airbag is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
1
For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag*
01
22
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Key switch off - PACOS*
General information
The airbag for the front passenger seat can be
deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch,
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For
information on how to activate/deactivate, see
under the heading Activating/deactivating.
Key switch off/switch
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
is located on the passenger end of the instru-
ment panel and is accessible when the pas-
senger door is open, (see under the heading
below, Activating/deactivating).
Check that the switch is in the required posi-
tion. Volvo recommends that the key blade is
used to change position.
For information on the key blade, see
page 127.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
WARNING
If the car is equipped with a front passenger
airbag, but does not have a switch (PACOS),
then the airbag will always be activated.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated and the symbol
in the roof
console is illuminated. Failure to follow this
advice could endanger the life of the child.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas-
senger seat if the text message in the roof
console indicates that the airbag is deacti-
vated, and if the warning symbol for the air-
bag system is also displayed on the com-
bined instrument panel. This indicates that
there has been a severe malfunction. Volvo
recommends that you visit an authorised
Volvo workshop as soon as possible.
Activating/deactivating
Switch location
The airbag is activated. With the switch in
this position, children taller than 140 cm
can sit in the front passenger seat, but
never children in a child seat or on a
booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
in this position, children in a child seat or
on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
than 140 cm.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag*
01
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
23
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion on the front passenger seat
when the airbag is activated. This applies to
everyone shorter than 140 cm.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in
the front passenger seat when the airbag is
deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
Messages
2
G018082
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
deactivated.
A text message and a symbol in the roof con-
sole indicate that the airbag for the front pas-
senger seat is deactivated (see preceding illus-
tration).
G018083
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
activated.
A warning symbol in the roof console indicates
that the airbag for the front passenger seat is
activated (see preceding illustration).
NOTE
When the remote control key is turned to
key position II or III the warning symbol for
the airbag is displayed on the combined
instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds, see
page 19.
Following which, the indicator in the roof
console is illuminated showing the correct
status for the front passenger seat airbag.
For more information about the different key
positions, see page 154.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags)
01
24
Side airbag
G020118
Side airbag locations.
In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil-
lars, the floor, the roof and other structural
parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-
er's and front passenger seats protect the
chest area and are an important part of the
SIPS. The side airbags are located in the front
seat backrests.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repairs are only
carried out by an authorised Volvo
workshop. Defective work in the SIPS-
bag system could cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury.
Do not place any objects in the area
between the outside of the seat and the
door panel, since this area is required
by the side airbag.
Volvo recommends the use only of car
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other
seat covers may impede the operation
of the side airbags.
Side airbags are a supplement the seat-
belts. Always use a seatbelt.
Child seats and side airbags
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag.
A child seat or booster cushion can be placed
on the front passenger seat provided that the
car does not have an activated
1
passenger air-
bag.
Location
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
1
For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 22.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags)
01
25
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags
and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips
the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.
The airbag inflates between the occupant and
the door panel and thereby cushions the initial
impact. The airbag deflates when compressed
by the collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
01 Safety
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
01
26
Properties
G019985
The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a
part of SIPS and the airbags. It is fitted in the
headlining along both sides of the roof and
protects the car's occupants sitting in the outer
seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the
sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the
driver and passengers from striking their heads
on the inside of the car during a collision.
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hook is only
designed for light clothing (not for solid
objects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the
car's headlining, door pillars or side panels.
This could compromise the intended pro-
tection. Volvo recommends that you only
ever use Volvo genuine parts that are
approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under
the top edge of the side windows. Other-
wise, the intended protection of the inflat-
able curtain, which is concealed in the head-
lining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
01 Safety
WHIPS
01
27
Protection against whiplash injury – WHIPS
G020347
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con-
sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe-
cially designed head restraints for the front
seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the col-
lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
have an influence.
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Properties of the seat
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front
seat backrests are lowered backward to alter
the seating position of the driver and front seat
passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash
injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS system and child seats/booster
cushions
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the WHIPS system.
Correct seating position
For the best possible protection, the driver and
front seat passenger should sit in the centre of
the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
01 Safety
WHIPS
01
28
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system
G020125
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the
driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the
WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat back-
rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the
function of the WHIPS system.
G020126
Do not place objects in the rear seat that may pre-
vent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the
corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not touch the folded
backrest.
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision,
the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo
recommends that it is checked by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
capacity may have been lost even if the
seats appear to be undamaged.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys-
tem checked even after a minor rear-end
collision.
01 Safety
When the systems deploy
01
29
Activating the systems
System Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner, front seat In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or rear-end collision
Seatbelt tensioner, outside rear seat In a frontal collision
Airbags
In a frontal collision
A
Side airbags (SIPS)
In a side-impact accident
A
Inflatable Curtain IC
In a side-impact accident
A
Whiplash protection WHIPS In a rear-end collision
A
The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of
the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags have been deployed, the follow-
ing is recommended:
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
that you have it conveyed to an authorised
Volvo workshop. Do not drive with
deployed airbags.
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The airbag, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys-
tems are deployed only once during a colli-
sion
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is
located in the centre console. If the centre
console is drenched with water or other liq-
uid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not
attempt to start the car since the airbags
may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo rec-
ommends that you have it conveyed to an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They
can make steering difficult. Other safety
systems may also be damaged. The smoke
and dust created when the airbags are
deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/
injury after intensive exposure. In case of
irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid
deployment sequence and airbag fabric
may cause friction and skin burns.
01 Safety
Crash mode
01
30
Driving after a collision
G029042
If the car is involved in a collision, the text
CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL may appear on
the information display. This means that the car
has reduced functionality. Crash mode is a
protective state that is enforced when the col-
lision may have damaged any of the car's vital
functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for
one of the safety systems, or the brake system.
Attempting to start the car
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you
may attempt to start the car.
Firstly, remove the remote control key and then
reinsert it. The car's electronics will then try to
reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to
start the car. If
CRASH MODE SEE
MANUAL
is still shown on the display then the
car must not be driven or towed. Even if the car
appears to be driveable, hidden damage may
make the car impossible to control once mov-
ing.
Moving the car
If NORMAL MODE is shown after CRASH
MODE SEE MANUAL
has been reset, the car
can be moved carefully out of a dangerous
position. Do not move the car further than nec-
essary.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
electronics yourself if the car has been in
crash mode. This could result in personal
injury or the car not functioning as normal.
Volvo recommends that you always engage
an authorised Volvo workshop to check and
restore the car to
NORMAL MODE after
CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL has been
displayed.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL message is
displayed. Leave the car at once.
WARNING
If the car is in crash mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its loca-
tion. Volvo recommends that you have it
conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
31
Children should sit comfortably and
safely
Volvo recommends that children travel in rear-
facing child seats until as late an age as pos-
sible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then
front-facing booster cushions/child seats until
up to 10 years of age.
The position of a child in the car and the choice
of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
and size, for more information, see page 33.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of
children in cars vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child
to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,
booster cushions & attachment devices) which
is designed for your particular car. Using Vol-
vo's child safety equipment provides you with
optimum conditions for your child to travel
safely in the car. Furthermore, the child safety
equipment fits and is easy to use.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
Child seats
G020128
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is
important to read the installation instruc-
tions included with the product.
Do not attach the straps for the child seat to
the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or
beams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam-
age the straps.
Look in the installation instructions for the child
seat for the correct fitting.
Location of child seats
You may place:
a child seat/booster cushion on the front
passenger seat, provided the passenger
airbag is not activated
1
.
one or more child seats/booster cushions
in the rear seat.
Always fit child seats/booster cushions in the
rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. A
child in the front passenger seat could suffer
serious injury if the airbag deploys.
1
For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
32
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated
2
.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat if the airbag is
activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could rest
on the seatbelt buckle's opening button
must not be used, as they could cause the
seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
Label Airbag
Label fitted on the end face of the instrument panel
on the passenger side, see the illustration on page
22.
2
For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 22.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
``
33
Recommended child seats
3
Weight
Front seat
A
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max. 10 kg
Group 0+
max. 13 kg
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
ISOFIX fixture system.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(L)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) -
rear-facing child seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 03301146
(U)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt and straps. Use a protective
cushion between the child seat and the
dashboard.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt, straps and support legs.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt, straps and support legs.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Child seats which are universally
approved.
(U)
Child seats which are universally
approved.
(U)
Child seats which are universally
approved.
(U)
3
With regard to other child seats the car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
34
Weight
Front seat
A
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 1
9 – 18 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac-
ing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac-
ing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt and straps. Use a protective
cushion between the child seat and the
dashboard.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt, straps and support legs.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-
facing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt, straps and support legs.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat,
secured with the ISOFIX fixture system
and straps.
Type approval: E5 03171
(L)
Child seats which are universally
approved.
(U)
Child seats which are universally
approved.
(U)
Child seats which are universally
approved.
(U)
01 Safety
Child safety
01
``
35
Weight
Front seat
A
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac-
ing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt and straps
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac-
ing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt and straps
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-fac-
ing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-fac-
ing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-fac-
ing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(L)
01 Safety
Child safety
01
36
Weight
Front seat
A
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 2/3
15 – 36 kg
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo
Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo
Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo
Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
Booster cushion with and without back-
rest (Booster Cushion with and without
backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
(UF)
Booster cushion with and without back-
rest (Booster Cushion with and without
backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
(UF)
Booster cushion with and without back-
rest (Booster Cushion with and without
backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
(UF)
Integrated booster cushion (Integrated
Booster Cushion) - available as a factory
fitted option.
Type approval: E5 03168
(B)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.
A
For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
37
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated
4
.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat if the airbag is
activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
Integrated booster cushions*
G015013
Volvo’s integrated booster cushion for the
outer rear seats is specially designed to pro-
vide optimum safety for children. Combined
with the regular seatbelts the integrated
booster cushion is approved for children
weighing between 15 and 36 kg.
Raising the booster cushion
G020808
Pull that handle to raise the booster cush-
ion.
Grasp the cushion with both hands and
push it backwards.
Push until it locks in place.
WARNING
The booster cushion must be in the locked
position before the child is placed there.
Check that:
the booster cushion in locked in position
the seatbelt is in contact with the child's
body and is not slack or twisted, and that
the seatbelt is positioned correctly across
the shoulder
the hip strap is low across the hips for opti-
mum protection
the seatbelt does not lie across the child's
throat or below the shoulder
Carefully adjust the position of the head
restraint to suit the child.
4
For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 22.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
38
WARNING
Repair or replacement should only be per-
formed by a workshop. Volvo recommends
that you contact an authorised Volvo work-
shop. Do not make any modifications or
additions to the booster cushion yourself.
If an integrated booster cushion has been
subjected to a major load, such as in con-
junction with a collision, the entire booster
cushion must be replaced. Even if the
booster cushion appears to be undamaged,
it may not afford the same level of protec-
tion. The booster cushion must also be
replaced if it is heavily worn.
Lowering the booster cushion
G014507
Pull the handle.
Lower the seat and press until it locks.
NOTE
Remember to stow away the booster cush-
ion before lowering the rear seat backrest.
Child safety locks, rear doors
The controls for operating the rear door power
windows and the rear door opening handles
can be blocked from opening from the inside.
For more information see page 137.
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats
G015268
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
are concealed behind the lower section of the
rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated
by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see
illustration above).
Press the seat cushion down to access the
mounting points.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
39
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the ISOFIX mounting points.
Size classes
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in
different sizes. This means that not all child
seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.
Consequently, there is a size classification for
child seats using the ISOFIX fixture system in
order to assist users in choosing the correct
child seat (see the following table).
Size
class
Description
A Full size, front-facing child
seat
B Reduced size (alt. 1), front-
facing child seat
Size
class
Description
B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-
facing child seat
C Full size, rear-facing child
seat
D Reduced size, rear-facing
child seat
E Rear-facing infant seat
F Transverse infant seat, left-
hand
G Transverse infant seat, right-
hand
WARNING
Never place a child in the passenger seat if
the car is equipped with an activated airbag.
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi-
cation then the car model must be included
on the child seat's vehicle list.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda-
tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo
recommends.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
40
Types of ISOFIX child seat
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Infant seat transverse max. 10 kg F X X
G X X
Infant seat, rear-facing max. 10 kg E X OK
(IL)
Infant seat, rear-facing max. 13 kg E X OK
(IL)
D X
OK
A
(IL)
C X
OK
A
(IL)
Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X
OK
A
(IL)
C X
OK
A
(IL)
01 Safety
Child safety
01
``
41
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X
OK
B
(IUF)
B1 X
OK
B
(IUF)
A X
OK
B
(IUF)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A
In order to be able to fit the infant/child seat in the rear seat, the front passenger seat has been adjusted to a location in front of centre position.
B
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
42
Upper mounting points for child seats
G029703
Location, upper attachment points.
The car is equipped with upper mounting
points for child seats. These mounting points
are located on the rear side of the rear seat.
The upper mounting points are primarily
intended for use with front-facing child seats.
Volvo recommends that small children should
sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age
as possible.
The child seat's straps must be routed
between the head restraint and the backrest.
NOTE
For cars with folding head restraints on the
outside seats the head restraints should be
folded to facilitate the installation of this
type of child seat.
NOTE
For cars equipped with a cargo area cover
over the cargo area, this must be removed
before a child seat can be fitted in the
mounting points.
For detailed information on how to secure the
child seat in the upper mounting points, refer
to the instructions from the child seat manu-
facturer.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be
drawn through the hole in the head restraint
leg before they are tensioned at the attach-
ment point.
01 Safety
01
43
44
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Overview, left-hand drive cars................................................................ 46
Overview, right-hand drive cars.............................................................. 48
Driver's door control panel..................................................................... 50
Combined instrument panel.................................................................... 51
Indicator and warning symbols............................................................... 52
Information display.................................................................................. 56
Electrical socket...................................................................................... 58
Lighting panel.......................................................................................... 60
Left-hand stalk switch............................................................................. 64
Right-hand stalk switch.......................................................................... 67
Cruise control*........................................................................................ 70
Keypad in the steering wheel*................................................................ 72
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers............................. 73
Parking brake.......................................................................................... 74
Power windows....................................................................................... 75
Windows, rearview and door mirrors...................................................... 77
Power sunroof* ...................................................................................... 81
Personal preferences.............................................................................. 83
HomeLink
*............................................................................................ 86
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive cars
02
46
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive cars
02
47
Steering wheel adjustment
Bonnet release
Control panel
Direction indicators, main beam, trip com-
puter
Lighting, fuel filler flap opener
Door handle, lock button.
Air vents in dashboard
Air vent for side window
Cruise control
Horn, airbag
Combined instrument panel
Keypad for infotainment system
Windscreen wipers and washer, headlamp
washers
Ignition switch
Sunroof controls
No function
No function
Switch for interior lighting
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat air-
bag indicator
Interior rearview mirror
Display for climate control and infotain-
ment system
Infotainment system
Controls for climate control, infotainment
system and personal preferences
Climate control
Gear lever
Hazard warning flashers
Door handle
Glovebox
Parking brake
Electrical socket/cigarette lighter
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS
Switch, optional equipment
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, right-hand drive cars
02
48
G028204
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, right-hand drive cars
02
49
Electrical socket, cigarette lighter
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS
Switch, optional equipment
Parking brake
Control panel
Glovebox
Door handle
Air vent for side window
Air vents in dashboard
Gear lever
Climate control
Controls for climate control, infotainment
system and personal preferences
Infotainment system
Display for climate control and infotain-
ment system
Interior rearview mirror
Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat air-
bag indicator
Switch for interior lighting
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Reading lamp, right-hand side
No function
No function
Sunroof controls
Ignition switch
Windscreen wipers and washers, head-
lamp washers
Cruise control
Combined instrument panel
Horn, airbag
Keypad for infotainment system
Hazard warning flashers
Door handle, lock button
Lighting, fuel filler flap opener
Direction indicators, main beam, trip com-
puter
Bonnet release
Steering wheel adjustment
02 Instruments and controls
Driver's door control panel
02
50
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Driver's door control panel
Disengaging the rear power windows.
Electric child safety lock*
Power windows
Door mirror, left-hand side
Door mirrors, setting
Door mirror, right-hand side
02 Instruments and controls
Combined instrument panel
02
51
G029046
Speedometer.
Direction indicators, left.
Warning symbol.
Information display – Shows information or
warning messages, outside temperature
and clock. When the outside temperature
is between +2 °C to -5 °C a snowflake illu-
minates on the display. This warns of icy
roads. The outside temperature gauge
may show a slightly high reading after the
car has been stationary.
Information symbol.
Direction indicator, right.
Tachometer – Indicates engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Indicator and warning symbols.
Fuel gauge, see also trip computer, pag
e 65.
Main beam indicator.
Display – Display for automatic gear posi-
tion, rain sensor, odometer, trip meter and
cruise control.
Also shows gear shift indicator (GSI) and
gear positions in the D2 and DRIVe model,
see page 159.
Button for trip meter – Used to measure
short distances. Short presses on the but-
ton switches between the two trip meters
T1 and T2. A long press (more than 2 sec-
onds) resets an active trip meter to zero.
Temperature gauge - Used for the engine
cooling system. A message will appear on
the display if the temperature becomes too
high and the gauge goes into the red zone.
Bear in mind that extra lights placed in front
of the air intake, for example, reduce the
cooling capacity at high outside tempera-
tures and high engine loads.
Indicator and warning symbols.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
52
Functionality check, symbols
All indicator and warning symbols
1
illuminate
when the remote control key is turned to posi-
tion II before starting. This is to check that the
symbols are working. When the engine starts,
all the symbols should go out except the park-
ing brake symbol, which only goes out when
the brake is disengaged.
If the engine does not start within
five seconds, all symbols extin-
guish except the symbols for a
fault in the car's emissions system
and for low oil pressure. Certain
symbols may have no function,
depending on the car's specifica-
tions.
Symbols in the centre of the instrument
panel
G030755
The red warning symbol illumi-
nates when a fault has been indi-
cated which could affect the safety
and/or driveability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown on the
information display at the same time. The sym-
bol remains visible until the fault has been rec-
tified but the text message can be cleared with
the READ button, see page 56. The warning
symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with
other symbols.
When the symbol illuminates:
1. Stop in a safe manner. Do not drive the car
further.
2. Read the information on the information
display. Implement the action in accord-
ance with the message in the display. Clear
the message using READ.
The yellow information symbol illu-
minates and a text appears on the
information display. The message
text is cleared using the READ but-
ton, see page 56, or disappears
automatically after a period of time (time
depending on which function is indicated).
The yellow information symbol can also illumi-
nate in conjunction with other symbols.
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the sym-
bol and message are cleared using the
READ button, or disappear automatically
after a time.
1
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 56.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
53
Indicator symbols – left-hand side
G029048
Fault in car's emissions system
ABS fault
Rear fog lamp
Stability system DSTC
No function
Engine preheater (diesel)
Low level in fuel tank
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates then it
may be due to a fault in the car's
emissions system. Volvo recom-
mends that you seek assistance
from an authorised Volvo work-
shop for inspection.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then the
system is not working. The car's
regular brake system continues to
work, but without the ABS func-
tion.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. Drive to a workshop to have the ABS sys-
tem checked if the symbol remains lit.
Volvo recommends that you seek assis-
tance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Rear fog lamp
This symbol is lit when the rear fog
lamp is on.
Stability system DSTC*
For information on the system's
functions and symbols, see
page 171.
Engine preheater (diesel)
This symbol illuminates during
engine preheating. Preheating
occurs when the temperature is
below -2 °C. The car can be started
once the symbol goes out.
Low level in fuel tank
When the symbol illuminates the
level in the fuel tank is low, refuel
as soon as possible.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
54
Indicator symbols – right-hand side
G029049
Indicator symbol for trailer
Parking brake applied
Airbags – SRS
Low oil pressure
Seatbelt reminder
Alternator not charging
Fault in brake system
Indicator symbol for trailer
This symbol flashes when the
direction indicators are used and
the trailer is connected. If the sym-
bol does not flash then one of the
lamps on the trailer or the car is
faulty.
Parking brake applied
The symbol illuminates when the
parking brake is applied. Always
pull the parking brake lever to the
end position.
NOTE
The symbol illuminates irrespective of how
hard the parking brake is applied.
Airbags – SRS
If this symbol remains illuminated
or illuminates while driving, it
means a fault has been detected in
the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS or
IC system. Volvo recommends that
drive directly to an authorised Volvo workshop
for inspection.
Low oil pressure
2
If this symbol illuminates during
driving then the engine's oil pres-
sure is too low. Stop the engine
immediately and check the engine
oil level, top up if necessary. If the
symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal
Volvo recommends that you contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol illuminates if someone
in a front seat has not put on their
seatbelt or if someone in a rear
seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Alternator not charging
If this symbol illuminates while
driving, a fault has occurred in the
electrical system. Volvo recom-
mends that you visit an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake
fluid level may be too low.
2
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 56.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
55
Stop the car in a safe place and check the
level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 226. If the reservoir level is below
MIN then the car should not be driven fur-
ther. Volvo recommends that the car is
transported to an authorised Volvo work-
shop to have the brake system checked.
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols
illuminate at the same time, there
may be a fault in the brake force
distribution system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If both symbols extinguish, continue driv-
ing.
4. If the symbols remain illuminated, check
the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 226.
5. If the brake fluid level is normal but the
symbols are still illuminated, the car can be
driven, with great care, to a workshop to
have the brake system checked. Volvo rec-
ommends that you seek assistance from
an authorised Volvo workshop.
6.
If the level in the reservoir is below MIN
then the car should not be driven any fur-
ther. Have the car transported to a work-
shop to have the brake system checked.
Volvo recommends that you seek assis-
tance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the
same time, there is a risk that the rear end
will skid during heavy braking.
Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors, the bonnet
3
or the tailgate
is not properly closed, the driver will be
reminded of this.
Low speed
If the car moves at a speed less
than 5 km/h, the information sym-
bol illuminates and
DRIVER
DOOR OPEN
, PASSENGER
DOOR OPEN
,LEFT REAR
DOOR OPEN
, BONNET OPEN or RIGHT
REAR DOOR OPEN
is shown on the display.
Stop the car safely as soon as possible and
close the door or bonnet.
High speed
If the car is moving faster than
10 km/h, the symbol illuminates
and one of the texts indicated in
the preceding paragraph appears
on the display.
Tailgate reminder
If the tailgate is open, this informa-
tion symbol will illuminate and
TAILGATE OPEN will appear on
the display.
3
Only cars with alarm.
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
02
56
Messages
G029050
When a warning or indicator symbol illuminates
the information display shows a supplemen-
tary message.
Press the READ button (1).
Switch between messages with the READ but-
ton. Fault messages are stored in the memory
until the fault is rectified.
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are
using the trip computer, the message must
be read (press READ) before the previous
activity can be resumed.
Message Specification
STOP SAFELY
A
Stop the car in a safe
manner and turn off
the engine. Serious
risk of damage.
SERVICE
URGENT
A
Volvo recommends
that an authorised
Volvo workshop
checks the car
immediately.
SEE MANUAL
A
Read the Owner's
Manual.
SERVICE
REQUIRED
A
Volvo recommends
that an authorised
Volvo workshop
checks the car as
soon as possible.
HIGH ENGINE
TEMP STOP
ENGINE
Stop the car in a safe
manner and turn off
the engine. Serious
risk of damage.
BOOK TIME FOR
SERVICE
Time to book regular
service. Volvo rec-
ommends that an
authorised Volvo
workshop carries
out the service.
Message Specification
TIME FOR REGU-
LAR SERVICE
Time for regular
service. Volvo rec-
ommends that an
authorised Volvo
workshop carries
out the service. The
timing is determined
by the number of kil-
ometres driven,
number of months
since the last serv-
ice, engine running
time and oil grade.
SERVICE OVER-
DUE
If the service inter-
vals are not followed
then the warranty
does not cover any
damaged parts.
Volvo recommends
that an authorised
Volvo workshop car-
ries out the service.
TRANSMISSION
OIL CHANGE NEE-
DED
Volvo recommends
that an authorised
Volvo workshop
checks the car as
soon as possible.
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
02
57
Message Specification
REMINDER
CHECK OIL LEVEL
Check the oil level.
The message is
shown every 10
000 km (certain
engine variants). For
information on
checking the oil
level, see page 222.
SOOT FILTER
FULL SEE OWNER
MANUAL
Diesel particle filter
requires regenera-
tion, see page 148.
DSTC SPIN CON-
TROL OFF
The function of the
stability and traction
control system is
reduced, see
page 172 for more
variants.
Message Specification
TRANSMISSION
PERFORMANCE
LOW
The gearbox cannot
handle full capacity.
Drive carefully until
the message clears,
see page 163.
If shown repeatedly
then Volvo recom-
mends that an
authorised Volvo
workshop is contac-
ted.
Message Specification
TRANSMISSION
OIL TEMP HIGH
Drive more smoothly
or stop the car in a
safe manner. Disen-
gage the gear and
run the engine at
idling speed until the
message clears. For
more information,
see page 163.
TRANSM OIL
TEMP STOP
SAFELY
Critical fault. Stop
the car immediately
in a safe manner.
Volvo recommends
that an authorised
Volvo workshop is
contacted.
B
A
Part of message, shown together with information on where
the problem has arisen.
B
For more messages concerning automatic transmission, see
page 163.
02 Instruments and controls
Electrical socket
02
58
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
12 V electrical socket
G019621
Electrical socket and cigarette lighter.
The electrical socket can be used for various
accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. TV screens,
music players and mobile phones. For the
socket to supply current, the remote control
key must be in at least position I, see
page 154.
IMPORTANT
Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is
used at a time. If both sockets are used
simultaneously, 7.5 A (90 W) per socket is
applicable.
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when
the socket is not in use.
NOTE
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g.
TV screens, music players and mobile
phones - which are connected to one of the
passenger compartment's 12V electrical
sockets, could be activated by the climate
control system, even when the remote con-
trol key has been removed or when the car
is locked, for example, when the parking
heater is activated at a preset time.
For this reason remove the plugs from the
electrical sockets for optional equipment or
accessories when not in use because the
battery could be drained in the event of such
an occurrence!
Cigarette lighter*
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.
The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull
out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils.
Electrical socket in the rear seat
G029082
Electrical socket in the rear seat.
The electrical socket in the rear seat can be
used for various accessories, see "12 V elec-
trical socket" above.
NOTE
Cigarette lighter does not work in this
socket.
The electrical socket is designed for 12 V. For
the socket to supply current, the remote con-
trol key must be in at least position I, see
page 154.
02 Instruments and controls
Electrical socket
02
59
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when
the socket is not in use.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
60
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
G020139
Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling
Light switches
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and
instrument lighting
Front fog lamps*
Opening the fuel filler flap
Rear fog lamp
Posi-
tion
Specification
Automatic/deactivated dipped
beam. Only main beam flash.
Position/parking lamps
Automatic dipped beam. Main
beam and main beam flash
work in this position.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical align-
ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz-
zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting
the height of the beam.
1.
Turn the remote control key to position II.
2. Turn the headlamp control (2) to one of the
end positions.
3. Roll the control (1) up or down respectively
to raise or lower beam alignment.
Cars with active Xenon headlamps - ABL* have
automatic headlamp levelling, so there is no
control (1).
Position/parking lamps
Position/parking lamps can be switched on
irrespective of remote control key position.
Turn the headlamp control (2) to the centre
position.
When the remote control key is in position II the
position/parking lamps and number plate light-
ing are always on.
Headlamps
Automatic dipped beam*
Dipped beam comes on automatically when
the remote control key is turned to position II,
except when the headlamp control (2) is in the
centre position. If necessary, the automatic
dipped beam can be deactivated. Volvo rec-
ommends that this is performed by an author-
ised Volvo workshop.
Automatic dipped beam, main beam
1.
Turn the remote control key to position II.
2. Dipped beam is activated by means of
turning the headlamp control (2) clockwise
to the end position.
3. Main beam is activated by means of mov-
ing the left-hand stalk switch towards the
steering wheel to the end position and
releasing it, see page 64.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
61
The lamps are switched off automatically when
the remote control key is turned to position I or
0.
Instrument lighting
The instrument lighting is switched on when
the remote control key is in position II and the
headlamp control (2) is in one of the end posi-
tions. The lighting is automatically dimmed
during the day and can be controlled manually
at night.
Roll the control up or down (3) for brighter
or dimmer lighting.
Enhanced display lighting
To facilitate reading the odometer, trip meter,
clock and outside temperature gauge, these
illuminate when the car is unlocked and when
the remote control key is removed from the
ignition switch. The displays extinguish when
the car is locked.
Fog lamps
NOTE
Regulations for use of fog lamps vary from
country to country.
Front fog lamps*
The front fog lamps can be switched on along
with the headlamps or the position lamps/park-
ing lamps.
Press the button (4).
The light in the button (4) illuminates when the
front fog lamps are switched on.
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on with
the headlamps or the front fog lamps.
Press the button (6).
The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the com-
bined instrument panel and the light in the but-
ton (6) illuminate when the rear fog lamp is
switched on.
Fuel filler flap
Press button (5) to open the fuel filler flap when
the car is unlocked, see page 134.
Active Xenon headlamps*
G026507
Lighting panel, for active Xenon headlamps
If the car is equipped with active Xenon head-
lamps (Active Bending Lights, ABL) the light
from the headlamps follows the steering wheel
movement in order to provide maximum light-
ing in bends and junctions and so provide
increased safety.
The LED
illuminates when the function
is activated. The LED flashes and an error mes-
sage is shown on the information display in the
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
62
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
event of a malfunction. The function is only
active in twilight or darkness and only when the
car is moving.
The function can be deactivated/activated with
the headlamp control.
G020789
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)
and activated (right) respectively.
Daytime running lights - DRL*
To save fuel, daytime running lights (Daytime
Running Light) can be selected during the day
instead of the more energy-intensive dipped
beam. The daytime running lights mounted in
the spoiler use bright, low-energy diode tech-
nology.
Position A automatically gives DRL daytime run-
ning lights during the day.
Posi-
tion
Specification
Daytime running lights
Daytime running lights when the
car is being driven. Automatic
switching to parking lights when
the car is parked.
Headlamps and position lamps
Daytime running lights during
daytime driving. Automatic
switching to headlamps and
position lamps in poor light con-
ditions and when windscreen
wipers or rear fog lamps are
activated.
If the car is equipped with active
Xenon headlamps (Active
Bending Lights, ABL) then this
function is also activated.
With the light switch in position A, the daytime
running lights are activated automatically dur-
ing the day. This is regulated by a light sensor
which switches from daytime running lights to
dipped beam off the main headlamps at dusk
or when the daylight becomes too weak.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
63
NOTE
To achieve minimal energy consumption,
the rear lights are also switched off when
switching automatically from dipped beam
to DRLs.
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is
too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist
and rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with its lights in a cor-
rect state and in accordance with applicable
traffic regulations.
Brake light
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking. For information on the Emergency
brake lights and automatic hazard warning
flashers, see page 170.
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
02
64
Stalk switch positions
3
4
1
2
1
2
G026380
Direction indicators - short flash sequence
Direction indicators - continuous flash
sequence
Main beam flash
Home safe lighting and switching between
main and dipped beam.
Direction indicators
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to
position (1) and release.
> The direction indicators flash 3 times
and the stalk switch returns to its origi-
nal position.
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to
end position (2).
> The stalk switch remains in its end posi-
tion and is moved back manually, or
automatically by steering wheel move-
ment.
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch gently towards the
steering wheel to position (3).
> Main beam comes on until the stalk
switch is released.
Main beam flash only works when the remote
control key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Switching between main and dipped
beam
Move the stalk switch to the end position
(4) and release.
The remote control key must be in position II
and the headlamp control in end position, see
page 60, for main beam to be switched on.
Home safe lighting
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked. The standard delay is
30
1
seconds, but can be changed to 60 or 90
seconds, see page 84.
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
2. Move the stalk switch towards the steering
wheel to position (3) and release.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
1
Factory settings.
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
65
Trip computer*
G029052
READ - confirms
Thumbwheel
2
– browse between menus
and options in the trip computer list.
RESET
2
- resets
Controls
To scroll through trip computer information
turn the thumbwheel either up or down in
steps. The menus are in an infinite loop.
NOTE
If a warning message interrupts while you
are using the trip computer, this message
must be acknowledged. Acknowledge by
pressing the READ button and revert to the
trip computer function.
Functions
The trip computer displays the following infor-
mation:
--- KM/H AVERAGE SPEED
--.- KM/L INSTANTANEOUS
--.- L/100 KM AVERAGE
--- KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK
DSTC ON *, see page 171
--- MPH ACTUAL SPEED
3
AVERAGE SPEED
Average speed is calculated from the latest
reset, which is performed with the RESET but-
ton.
INSTANTANEOUS
Current fuel consumption is calculated every
second. The information on the display is
updated every couple of seconds. When the
car is stationary, "
--.-" appears on the display.
During the period for regeneration
4
fuel con-
sumption may increase, see page 148.
AVERAGE
Average fuel consumption is calculated from
the latest reset, which is performed with the
RESET button.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
a fuel-driven heater is used.
KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK
The range to empty is calculated based on the
average fuel consumption over the last 30 km.
No guaranteed range remains when the display
shows "
--- KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK
". Refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
fuel consumption is changed due to a
change in driving style or if a fuel-driven
heater is used for example.
MPH ACTUAL SPEED
3
Current speed is displayed in mph.
2
No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.
3
Certain markets.
4
Only applies to diesel cars with particle filter.
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
02
66
Resetting
1.
Select
--- KM/H AVERAGE SPEED or
--.- L/100 KM AVERAGE
2.
Reset with one press of the RESET button.
3.
One long press of the RESET button (at
least 5 seconds) resets both average
speed and average consumption simulta-
neously.
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
67
Windscreen wipers
Windscreen and headlamp washers
Rain sensor - On/Off
Thumbwheel
Rear window wiper and washer
Windscreen wipers off
The windscreen wipers are off
when the stalk switch is in position
0.
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch to make a
single sweep.
Intermittent wiping
You can adjust and set a suitable
speed for intermittent wiping. Turn
the thumbwheel (C) up for a shorter
interval between sweeps. Turn it
down to increase the delay.
Continuous wiping
The wipers sweep at normal
speed.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter –
ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen
in and that any snow or ice on the wind-
screen (and rear window) is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The wind-
screen must be wet when the windscreen
wipers are operating.
Windscreen/headlamp washer
Move the stalk switch toward the steering
wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
washers. The wipers will make several more
sweeps once the stalk switch is released.
High-pressure headlamp washing*
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlamps are washed as follows:
Dipped beam selected with the switch on light-
ing panel:
The headlamps are washed the first time the
windscreen is washed. Within the next ten
minutes, they are washed every fifth wash
cycle of the windscreen. In the event of a longer
interval the headlamps are washed each time.
Parking/position lamps selected with the
switch on the lighting panel:
Active Xenon headlamps are only washed
every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the
time that elapses.
Halogen headlamps are not washed.
The switch on the lighting panel is in position
0:
Active Xenon headlamps are only washed
every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the
time that elapses.
Halogen headlamps are not washed.
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
02
68
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Rear window wiper and washer
0
G021418
Move the stalk switch forward to start rear win-
dow washing and wiping. The wiper blade
makes several extra sweeps once washing has
finished. The button at the end of the stalk
switch has three positions:
Intermittent wiping: Depress the top of the
button.
Neutral position: Function deactivated.
Constant speed: Depress the bottom of
the button.
Wiper – reversing
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen
wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window
wiping. If the rear window wiper is already on
at normal speed, no change is made.
The function for intermittent wiping for reverse
can be deactivated. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Rain sensor*
G029053
The rain sensor automatically activates the
windscreen wipers based on how much water
it detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
the rain sensor can be adjusted using the
thumbwheel (C), see page 67.
Turn the thumbwheel upwards for higher sen-
sitivity and downwards for lower sensitivity, (an
extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is
turned upwards).
On/Off
When activating the rain sensor, the remote
control key must be in position I or II and the
windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in posi-
tion 0 (not activated).
Activating the rain sensor:
Press the button (B), see page 67. A display
symbol shows that the rain sensor is
active.
To turn the rain sensor off, either:
1. Press button (B)
2. Press the stalk switch downward to
another wiper program. If the stalk switch
is raised, the rain sensor will remain active,
the wipers make an extra sweep and then
return to rain sensor mode when the stalk
is released to position 0 (not activated), see
page 67.
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the remote control key is removed from
the ignition switch or five minutes after the igni-
tion is switched off.
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
02
69
IMPORTANT
At an automatic car wash: Deactivate the
rain sensor by pressing the button (B) while
the remote control key is in position I or II.
Otherwise, the windscreen wipers could
start swiping and become damaged.
Thumbwheel
Use the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency of
wiper sweeps when intermittent wiping is
selected, or the sensitivity to rain when the rain
sensor is selected.
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control*
02
70
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Activating
G020141
The controls for cruise control are to the left of
the steering wheel.
Setting the desired speed:
1.
Press the CRUISE button.
CRUISE is
shown on the combined instrument panel.
2.
Touch + or to lock the vehicle speed.
CRUISE-ON appears in the combined
instrument panel.
Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds
below 30 km/h or above 200 km/h.
Increasing or decreasing speed
G029054
Increase or decrease the speed by press-
ing and holding + or . The speed of the car
when the button is released is set as the
new speed.
A brief press (less than half a second) on + or
changes the speed by 1 km/h or 1 mph
1
.
NOTE
A temporary increase in speed (less than
one minute) using the accelerator, such as
while overtaking, does not affect the cruise
control setting. When you release the accel-
erator, the car will return to the programmed
speed.
Temporary disengagement
Press 0 to disengage the cruise control
temporarily.
CRUISE will be shown on the
combined instrument panel. The speed set
earlier is stored in the memory.
The cruise control is also temporarily disen-
gaged when:
the brake pedal or clutch pedal is
depressed
speed falls below 25-30 km/h
1
when trav-
elling uphill
the gear selector is moved to position N
wheel spin or wheel lock-up occurs
a temporary increase in speed lasts longer
than one minute.
1
Depending on engine type.
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
71
Return to the set speed
– Press this button to resume the
previously set speed.
CRUISE
ON
appears on the combined
instrument panel.
Disengaging
Press CRUISE to disengage the cruise
control.
CRUISE ON clears on the com-
bined instrument panel.
02 Instruments and controls
Keypad in the steering wheel*
02
72
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Button functions
The keypad is available in two versions depending
on the equipment in the car.
The four buttons at the bottom of the steering
wheel keypad control the radio and the phone.
The function of a button depends on which
system is active. The steering wheel keypad
can be used to scroll between preset stations,
change CD tracks and adjust the volume.
Press and hold one of the arrow keys to
fast forward/reverse or search for the next
station.
The phone must be active to make settings in
the phone system. Activate the phone function
with the PHONE button in the centre console
in order to enable control of the phone system
with the arrow keys.
To return to Audio only, press EXIT.. To return
to the phone menu, press EXIT once again.
With the ENTER button you can select, acti-
vate and deactivate options in menus. The but-
ton can also be used to access the folder struc-
ture and start the playback of audio files if a
disc with audio files is inserted in the CD player/
CD changer*. For more information, see
page 264.
02 Instruments and controls
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers
02
73
Steering wheel adjustment
G020143
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and reach.
1. Pull the lever towards you to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you best.
3. Push back the lever to fix the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the
steering wheel lightly at the same time as
you push the lever back.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel before driving off,
never while driving. Before driving, check
that the steering wheel is fixed in position.
Hazard warning flashers
G020144
Use the hazard warning flashers (all direction
indicators flash) when the car is stopped where
it could be a traffic hazard or obstruction. Press
the button to activate the function.
A sufficiently violent collision or heavy braking
activates the hazard warning flashers automat-
ically, see page 170. The function can be
deactivated with the button.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the use of hazard
warning flashers vary from country to coun-
try.
02 Instruments and controls
Parking brake
02
74
General
Instrument panel warning symbol and warning
label for risk of crushing.
The lever is located between the front seats.
WARNING
Make sure that children, other passengers
or objects are not in danger of becoming
trapped in any way when the parking brake
is applied or released by the driver.
Applying the parking brake
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Pull the lever firmly.
> The instrument panel's warning symbol
is illuminated.
NOTE
The warning lamp symbol in the combined
instrument panel illuminates irrespective of
how hard the parking brake is applied.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make
sure that the car is at a standstill position.
4. If the vehicle moves then the parking brake
lever must be pulled up a little bit further.
When parking the vehicle, always engage
1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the
gear selector in position P (for automatic
gearbox).
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill:
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
WARNING
Get into the habit of always applying the
parking brake when parking on a slope -
leaving the car in gear, or in P if it has auto-
matic transmission, is not sufficient to hold
the car in all situation.
Disengaging the parking brake
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Pull the parking brake lever up slightly,
press the button, lower the parking brake
lever and release the button.
> The instrument panel's warning symbol
is switched off.
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
02
75
Operation
The power windows are operated using the
controls in the doors. The key position must be
I or II for the power windows to operate.
The windows continue to work for a limited
amount of time when the car is stopped and
after the remote control key is removed, provi-
ded none of the doors is opened. Operate the
windows with caution.
To open a window:
Depress the front of the control.
To close a window:
Raise the front of the control.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
when the rear windows are open is to also
open the front windows slightly.
Remote control and lock buttons
To operate the power windows with lock but-
tons and remote control, see pages 126 and
134.
WARNING
Make sure that children and other passen-
gers cannot be trapped in any way when
closing the windows. Pay close attention if
the rear door windows are controlled from
the driver's door or if the windows are
closed with the remote control.
Driver's door
Controls, power windows.
Rear window controls
Front window controls
The driver can operate all of the power win-
dows from the driver's seat.
The windows can be opened and closed in two
ways:
Manual operation
Depress one of the controls (1) or (2) gently or
raise it gently. The power window opens or
closes as long as the switch is actuated.
Automatic operation
Fully depress one of the controls (2) or raise it,
then release. The side window will then open
or close automatically. If the window is
obstructed by an object, the movement will
stop.
WARNING
The function that interrupts the movement
of the windows in the event of them being
blocked works with both automatic and
manual closing, although not with pinch
protection deployed.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to switch off the supply to the
power windows by removing the remote
control key if the driver leaves the car.
Make sure that children and other passen-
gers cannot be trapped in any way when
closing the windows.
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
02
76
Blocking power windows in the rear
doors
Blocking rear power windows and electric child
safety locks*.
The light in the switch is lit
The rear door windows can only be operated
from the driver's door.
The light in the switch is extinguished
The rear door windows can be operated both
with the control on each rear door and with the
controls on the driver's door.
NOTE
If the car has electric child safety locks on
the rear doors, the light indicates that these
are also activated. The doors then cannot
be opened from the inside. A text message
is shown on the display when the electric
child safety locks are activated.
Front passenger seat
Front passenger seat.
The control in the front passenger door oper-
ates that window only.
Rear power windows
The rear door windows can be operated with
the control on each door or with the switch on
the driver's door. If the light in the switch for
blocking the rear power windows (located in
the control panel in the driver's door) is lit, the
rear door windows can only be operated from
the driver's door. The windows in the rear
doors are operated in the same way as the
windows in the front doors.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
02
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
77
Interior rearview mirror
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use
dimming when disturbed by light from behind.
Dipping
Control for dimming
Normal position
Dimmed position.
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control (1)
is not available in mirrors with automatic dim-
ming.
Interior rearview mirror with compass*
G031043
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction in which the front of the car
is pointing. Eight different directions are shown
with English abbreviations:
N (north), NE (north
east),
E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
Calibrating the compass
G031045
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass is set for the geographical area
to which the car was delivered. The compass
should be calibrated if the car is moved across
several magnetic zones.
1. Stop the car in a wide open area with the
engine running at idling speed.
2. Press and hold button (1) for at least 6 sec-
onds. Following which, the character
C is
shown (the button is concealed so use a
paper clip for example to press it in).
3. Press and hold button (1) for at least 3 sec-
onds. The number for the current magnetic
zone is displayed.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
02
78
4. Press the button (1) repeatedly until the
number for the required magnetic zone (
1–
15
) is shown, refer to the map of magnetic
zones for the compass.
5. Wait until the display returns to showing
the character
C.
6. Following which, press and hold the button
in for 9 seconds and select
L for left-hand
drive cars and
R for right-hand drive.
7. Drive slowly in a circle with a maximum
speed of 10 km/h until a compass direction
is shown on the display, which indicates
that the calibration is complete.
G020150
Magnetic zones, Europe.
G020151
Magnetic zones, Asia.
G020152
Magnetic zones, South America.
G020153
Magnetic zones, Australia.
G020154
Magnetic zones, Africa.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
79
Door mirrors
The controls for adjusting the two door mirrors
are at the front of the driver's door armrest. The
rearview mirrors can be operated in key posi-
tion I and II.
1.
Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light on the button illumi-
nates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3.
Press the L or R button again. The light
goes out.
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces. This can be carried out in key
position I and II.
Retracting the mirrors
1.
Press the L and R button at the same time.
2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automat-
ically stop in the fully retracted position.
WARNING
The door mirror on the driver's side is the
wide-angled type to provide optimal vision.
Objects may appear further away than they
actually are.
Folding out the mirrors
1.
Press the L and R button at the same time.
2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automat-
ically stop in the fully extended position.
Automatic retracting/extending
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control or using the Keyless-system,
see page 130, the door mirrors are automati-
cally retracted/extended.
NOTE
The door mirrors will not be extended auto-
matically during unlocking if they were
retracted using the controls in the door.
If the car is locked with the remote control
and is then started, the door mirrors will still
be extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated
under Car settings…
Mirror fold on
locking, see page 84 for a description of the
menu system.
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be reset to the neutral
position for electric retracting and extending to
work.
1.
Use the L and R buttons to retract the mir-
rors.
2.
Extend the mirrors again with the L and R
button. The mirrors are now reset to the
neutral.
Home safe and approach lighting
The light* on the door mirrors illuminates when
the approach lighting or home safe lighting is
activated.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
02
80
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS*
BLIS is an information system that under cer-
tain conditions can help to draw the driver's
attention to vehicles moving in the same direc-
tion in the so-called "blind spot", see
page 175.
Water and dirt-repellent coating*
The front side windows are treated
with a coating which improves the view
in poor weather conditions. For information on
maintenance, see page 211.
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice
from the windows. The water and dirt-repel-
lent coating could be damaged.
02 Instruments and controls
Power sunroof*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
81
Open positions
G007503
The sunroof controls are located in the roof
panel. The sunroof can be opened in two posi-
tions:
Ventilation position, up at the rear edge
Sliding position, backwards/forwards
The remote control key must be in position I or
II.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Switch off the supply to the power sunroof
by removing the remote control key if the
driver leaves the car.
G029222
Opening, automatic
Opening, manual
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic
Opening, ventilation position
Closing, ventilation position
Ventilation position
Open:
Press the rear edge of the control (5)
upward.
Close:
Pull the rear edge of the control (6) down-
ward.
From ventilation position to fully open sunroof:
Pull the control rearward to the end posi-
tion (1) and release.
Sliding position
Automatic operation
Pull the control past the point of resistance
(2) to the rear end position (1) or past the
point of resistance (3) to the forward end
position (4) and release. The sunroof
opens/closes completely.
Manual operation
Open:
Pull the control rearward to the point of
resistance (2). The sunroof moves to maxi-
mum open position as long as the button
is kept depressed.
Close:
Press the control forward to the point of
resistance (3). The sunroof moves to
02 Instruments and controls
Power sunroof*
02
82
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
closed position as long as the button is
kept depressed.
WARNING
The sunroof's pinch-protection function
only operates during automatic closing, not
manual closing.
Closing with remote control or lock
button
G020157
One long press on the lock button closes
the sunroof and all the windows. The doors
and the tailgate are locked.
If you need to interrupt closing:
Press the lock button again.
WARNING
Make sure that children or other passengers
are not in danger of becoming trapped in
any way when closing the sunroof with the
remote control. Always operate the sunroof
with caution.
Sunscreen
The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior
sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back auto-
matically when the sunroof is opened. Grip the
handle and slide the screen forward to close it.
Pinch protection
The sunroof's pinch protection function is acti-
vated if the hatch is blocked by an object. If
blocked, the sunroof will stop and automati-
cally open to the previous position.
WARNING
The sunroof's pinch protection function only
operates during automatic closing, not dur-
ing manual closing.
Make sure that nobody is in danger of
becoming trapped in any way when closing
the sunroof.
Wind deflector
The sunroof has a wind deflector that is folded
up when the sunroof is in the open position.
02 Instruments and controls
Personal preferences
02
83
Possible settings
Personal preferences can be set for some of
the car's functions. This applies to locks, cli-
mate control and audio functions. For audio
functions, see page 254.
Control panel
Control panel.
Display
MENU
EXIT
ENTER
Navigation
Use
The settings are shown on the display (A).
Open the menu to enter settings:
1.
Press MENU (B).
2.
Scroll, for example, to
Car settings… with
the navigation button (E).
3.
Press ENTER (D).
4. Select an alternative with the navigation
button (E).
5.
Press ENTER to activate the selection.
Activated function is shown in the display
with
. Deactivated function is shown in
the display with
.
Close the menu:
Press EXIT (C) for approximately one sec-
ond.
Clock, adjustment
The hour and minute are each adjusted sepa-
rately.
1. Use the numbers on the keypad or "arrow
up" or "arrow down" on the navigation but-
ton (E).
2. Select the number for adjustment using
"arrow right" or "arrow left" on the naviga-
tion button.
3.
Press ENTER to start the clock.
NOTE
If the car has a 12-hour clock then AM/PM
is selected using "arrow up" or "arrow
down" after the final minute number has
been adjusted.
Climate settings
Automatic blower adjust
The fan speed can be set to AUTO mode in
cars equipped with ECC:
Select from
Low, Normal and High.
Recirculation timer
When the timer is active, the air recirculates for
3-12 minutes, depending on the outside air
temperature.
02 Instruments and controls
Personal preferences
02
84
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Select On/Off depending on whether or not
you wish the recirculation timer to be
active.
Reset all
Resets the climate function options to the fac-
tory settings.
Car settings
Retract mirrors when locking*
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control the door mirrors can be retrac-
ted/extended automatically. The On/Off option
is available.
Reduced guard*
The deadlocks function can be temporarily
deactivated and the alarm level reduced if
someone wishes to remain in the car and the
doors have to be locked from the outside. The
Activate once and Ask on exit options are
available, see pages 135 and 139.
Unlock confirm. light
The hazard warning flashers can provide feed-
back when the car is unlocked with the remote
control. The On/Off option is available.
Lock confirm. light
The hazard warning flashers can provide feed-
back when the car is locked with the remote
control. The On/Off option is available.
Doors – auto lock
When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h the
doors and tailgate can be locked automatically.
The On/Off option is available. Pulling the door
handle twice unlocks and opens the doors
from the inside.
Doors unlock
There are two alternatives for unlocking:
All doors – one press of the remote control
unlocks all doors and the tailgate.
Driver door, then all – one press of the
remote control unlocks the driver's door. A
second press then unlocks all doors and
the tailgate.
Keyless entry*
All doors - all doors are unlocked simul-
taneously.
Doors on same side – front and rear
doors on the same side are unlocked
simultaneously.
Both front doors – both front doors are
unlocked simultaneously.
Any door – any door or the tailgate can be
unlocked separately.
Simultaneous closing/opening of all
windows
This function can be selected for the lock but-
ton on the remote control and the front doors'
central locking button, as well as the outside
door handle button on cars with the keyless
system:
Auto. close all windows - all windows
and the sunroof are closed simultaneously
with one long press on the lock button.
This function can be selected for the unlock
button on the remote control and the front
doors' central locking button:
Auto. open all windows – all windows are
opened simultaneously with one long
press on the unlock button.
Approach lighting
Select the time the car's lights should remain
switched on when the approach lighting button
is pressed - see page 126.
The following alternatives are available:
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
Home safe lighting
Select the time the car's lights should remain
on when the left-hand stalk switch is pulled
back after the remote control key has been
removed - see page 64.
The following alternatives are available:
02 Instruments and controls
Personal preferences
02
85
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
Information
VIN number… - (Vehicle Identification
Number) is the car's unique identity num-
ber.
Number of keys… - The number of keys
registered for the car is shown.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink
*
02
86
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
G030070
HomeLink
is a programmable remote control
which can control up to three different devices
(e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor light-
ing and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing so
replace their remote controls. HomeLink
is
supplied built into the left-hand sun visor.
The HomeLink
panel consists of three pro-
grammable buttons and one indicator lamp.
NOTE
HomeLink
is designed not to work if the car
is locked from the outside.
Save the original remote controls for future
programming (e.g. when switching to
another car).
Delete the button programming when the
car is to be sold.
Metallic sun visors should not be used in
cars fitted with HomeLink
. This may have
an adverse effect on its function.
Operation
When HomeLink
is fully programmed it can be
used in place of the separate original remote
controls.
Depress the programmed button to activate
the garage door, alarm system etc. The indi-
cator lamp illuminates for the time that the but-
ton is kept depressed.
NOTE
If the ignition is not activated, HomeLink
will work for 30 minutes after the driver's
door has been opened.
The original remote controls can of course be
used in parallel with HomeLink
.
WARNING
If HomeLink
is used to operate a garage
door or gate, ensure that nobody is in the
vicinity of the door or gate while it is in
motion.
Do not use the HomeLink
remote control
for any garage door that does not have
safety stop and safety reverse. The garage
door must react immediately when it
detects that something is preventing its
movement, and stop directly and reverse. A
garage door without these characteristics
could cause personal injury. For further
information - contact the supplier via the
Internet: www.homelink.com.
Programming for the first time
The first step erases the memory in
HomeLink
and must not be carried out when
only one individual button is being reprogram-
med.
1. Depress the two outer buttons and do not
release until the indicator lamp starts to
flash after approx. 20 seconds. The flash-
ing indicates that HomeLink
is set in
"learn mode" and is ready to be pro-
grammed.
2. Position the original remote control
5-30 cm from HomeLink
. Monitor the indi-
cator lamp.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink
*
02
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
87
The particular distance that is required
between the original remote control and
HomeLink
depends on the programming
of the device in question. Perhaps several
attempts will be required at different dis-
tances. Maintain each position for approx.
15 seconds before trying a new one.
3. Depress the button for the original remote
control and the button to be programmed
on HomeLink
simultaneously. Do not
release the buttons until the indicator lamp
has changed over from slow to rapid flash-
ing. The rapid flashing indicates successful
programming.
4. Test the programming by depressing the
programmed button on HomeLink
and
watching the indicator lamp:
Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu-
minates with a constant glow when the
button is kept depressed, this indicates
that the programming is complete. The
garage door, gate or similar should now
be activated when the programmed
HomeLink
button is depressed.
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp
flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds
and then changes over to a constant
glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc-
ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds
and indicates that the device has a "roll-
ing code". The garage door, gate or sim-
ilar is not activated when the pro-
grammed HomeLink
button is
depressed. Continue the programming
in accordance with the following.
5.
Locate the "programming button
1
" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-
culty in finding the button - consult the
supplier's manual, or contact the supplier
via the Internet: www.homelink.com.
6. Depress and release the "programming
button". The button flashes for
approx. 30 seconds and the next step must
be carried out within this period.
7. Depress the programmed button on
HomeLink
, while the "programming but-
ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for
approx. 3 seconds and then release.
Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
up to 3 times to conclude the program-
ming.
Programming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual button, proceed in
accordance with the following:
1. Depress the required button on
HomeLink
and do not release until step 3
has been completed.
2.
When the indicator lamp on HomeLink
starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,
position the original remote control
5-30 cm from HomeLink
. Monitor the indi-
cator lamp.
The particular distance that is required
between the original remote control and
HomeLink depends on the programming of
the device in question. Perhaps several
attempts will be required at different dis-
tances. Maintain each position for approx.
15 seconds before trying a new one.
3. Depress the button on the original remote
control. The indicator lamp will start to
flash. When the flashing has changed over
from a slow to a rapid flashing - release
both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates
successful programming.
4. Test the programming by depressing the
programmed button on HomeLink and
watching the indicator lamp:
1
Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink
*
02
88
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu-
minates with a constant glow when the
button is kept depressed, this indicates
that the programming is complete. The
garage door, gate or similar should now
be activated when the programmed
HomeLink
button is depressed.
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp
flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds
and then changes over to a constant
glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc-
ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds
and indicates that the device has a "roll-
ing code". The garage door, gate or sim-
ilar is not activated when the pro-
grammed HomeLink
button is
depressed. Continue the programming
in accordance with the following.
5.
Locate the "programming button
2
" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-
culty in finding the button - consult the
supplier's manual, or contact the supplier
via the Internet: www.homelink.com.
6. Depress and release the "programming
button". The button flashes for approx. 30
seconds and the next step must be carried
out within this period.
7. Depress the programmed button on
HomeLink
, while the "programming but-
ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for
approx. 3 seconds and then release.
Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
up to 3 times to conclude the program-
ming.
Erasing programming
It is only possible to erase the programming for
all the buttons on HomeLink
, not for individual
buttons.
Depress the two outer buttons and do not
release until the indicator lamp starts to
flash after approx. 20 seconds.
>
HomeLink
is now set in so-called
"learn mode" and is ready to be pro-
grammed once more, see page 86.
2
Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
02 Instruments and controls
02
89
90
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on climate control................................................... 92
Manual climate control, AC..................................................................... 94
Electronic climate control, ECC*............................................................. 97
Air distribution....................................................................................... 100
Fuel-driven engine block heater
and passenger compartment heater*................................................... 101
Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)..................................................... 104
CLIMATE CONTROL
03 Climate control
General information on climate control
03
92
Air conditioning
The climate control system cools or heats as
well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger
compartment. The car is equipped with either
manual (AC) or electronic climate control (ECC,
Electronic Climate Control).
NOTE
The air conditioning system can be
switched off, but to ensure the best possible
air in the passenger compartment and pre-
vent the windows from misting, it should
always be on.
Misting windows
Remove misting on the insides of the windows
by first using the defroster function.
To reduce the risk of misting, clean the win-
dows with a normal window cleaning agent.
Ice and snow
Remove ice and snow from the climate control
air intake (the grille between the bonnet and the
windscreen).
Fault tracing and repair
Volvo recommends that you only entrust fault
tracing and repair of the climate control system
to an authorised Volvo workshop.
Refrigerant
The air conditioning system contains R134a
refrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlo-
rine, which means that it is harmless to the
ozone layer. The system must only be charged
with R134a refrigerant, see also page 294.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop carries out this work.
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compart-
ment is only cleaned with one filter. This must
be replaced at regular intervals. Follow the
Volvo Service Programme for the recom-
mended replacement intervals. If the car is
used in a severely contaminated environment,
it may be necessary to replace the filter more
often.
NOTE
There are different types of passenger com-
partment filter. Make sure that the correct
filter is fitted.
Display
There is a display above the climate control
panel. This displays climate control settings.
Personal preferences
You can set preferences for two climate control
functions:
Fan speed in AUTO mode (applies only to
cars with ECC).
Recirculation timer for passenger com-
partment air.
For information about these settings, see
page 83.
03 Climate control
General information on climate control
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
93
Air vents in the dashboard
G019942
Open
Closed
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the outer vents towards the side windows
to remove misting from the front side windows.
During cold weather - Close the centre vents
for optimum comfort and best demisting.
ECC*
Actual temperature
The temperature you select corresponds to the
physical experience with reference to factors
such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation
in and around the car.
The system includes a sun sensor which
detects the side from which the sun is shining
into the passenger compartment. This means
that the temperature can differ between the
right and left-hand air vents despite the con-
trols being set for the same temperature on
both sides.
Sensor location
The sun sensor is on the top side of the
dashboard.
The temperature sensor for the passenger
compartment is behind the climate control
panel.
The outside temperature sensor is located
on the door mirror.
The humidity sensor is located in the inte-
rior rearview mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.
Side windows and sunroof
To ensure that the air conditioning works sat-
isfactorily, close all side windows and the sun-
roof (if fitted).
Acceleration
The air conditioning system switches off tem-
porarily at full throttle. You may briefly feel a
temporary rise in temperature.
Condensation
In warm weather, condensation from the air
conditioning may drip under the car. This is
normal.
03 Climate control
Manual climate control, AC
03
94
Control panel
Fan
Recirculation
Defroster
Air distribution
AC ON/OFF – Air conditioning On/Off
Heated front left seat
Heated front right seat
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
Temperature
Functions
1. Fan
Increase or decrease the fan
speed by turning the knob.
If the knob is turned anticlock-
wise and the fan indicator in
the display goes out, the fan
and the air conditioning are
switched off. The display shows the fan symbol
and
OFF.
2. Recirculation
Recirculation can be used to
shut out bad air, exhaust
fumes, etc. from the passen-
ger compartment. The air in
the passenger compartment
is recirculated. No outside air
is taken into the car. Recircu-
lation (together with the air conditioning sys-
tem) cools the passenger compartment more
quickly in hot weather. If the air in the car recir-
culates for too long then there is a risk of the
windows misting.
03 Climate control
Manual climate control, AC
03
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
95
Timer
The timer function reduces the risk of icing,
misting and bad air (if recirculation is selected).
See page 83, for activating/deactivating the
function. When the Defroster (3) program is
selected, recirculation is deactivated.
3. Defroster
Used to quickly remove mist-
ing and ice from the wind-
screen and side windows. Air
flows to the windows at high
fan speed. The light in the
defroster button illuminates
when the function is active.
The following also takes place when the
defroster function is activated in order to pro-
vide maximum dehumidification in the passen-
ger compartment:
the air conditioning (AC) is automatically
switched on (can be switched off with the
AC button (5)
recirculation is automatically disengaged.
When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
4. Air distribution
The airflow can be distributed
to the windows, dashboard
vents or floor by pressing the
air distribution buttons.
A symbol on the display
above the climate control
panel and an illuminated light in the relevant
button indicate which function has been
selected.
Refer to the table on page 100.
5. AC – On/Off (ON/OFF)
ON: The air conditioning is on.
It is controlled by the system's
AUTO function. This way,
incoming air is cooled and
dehumidified.
OFF: The air conditioning is
off.
When the defroster function is activated the air
conditioning is automatically switched on (can
be switched off with the AC button). An illumi-
nated lamp above ON and OFF respectively in
the button shows the function selected.
6. and 7. Heated front seats*
Higher heat:
Press the button once – both lights illumi-
nate.
Lower heat:
Press the button once – one light illumi-
nates.
Heat off:
Press the button three times – light not illu-
minated.
8. Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
Heating is used to quickly
remove misting and ice from
the rear window and door mir-
rors. Press the button once to
start simultaneous rear win-
dow and rearview mirror
defrosting. The function is
active if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
The function is switched off manually or auto-
matically. Switch off manually with one press
03 Climate control
Manual climate control, AC
03
96
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
on the button. Automatic switching off discon-
nects the rear window and door mirrors after
12 – 20 minutes depending on outside tem-
perature.
During cold weather the defrosting* also con-
tinues after 20 minutes in order to keep the rear
window and door mirrors free of ice and mist.
The intensity of the defrosting can be adapted
to the outside temperature. This function must
be switched off manually.
9. Temperature
Select cooling or heating for
both driver and passenger
side.
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
97
Control panel
AUTO
Fan
Recirculation/Air quality system
Defroster
Air distribution
AC ON/OFF – Air conditioning On/Off
Heated front left seat
Heated front right seat
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
Temperature selector
Functions
1. AUTO
The AUTO function automat-
ically regulates climate con-
trol and maintains the
selected temperature. The
AUTO function controls heat-
ing, air conditioning, fan
speed, recirculation, and air
distribution.
If you select one or more manual functions, the
other functions continue to be controlled auto-
matically. All manual settings are switched off
when AUTO is switched on. The display shows
AUTO CLIMATE.
2. Fan
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed. If AUTO
is selected then fan speed is
regulated automatically. The
previously set fan speed is
disengaged.
NOTE
If the knob is turned anticlockwise and the
fan indicator in the display goes out, the fan
and the air conditioning are switched off.
The display shows the fan symbol and
OFF.
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
03
98
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3. Recirculation
The function is selected to
shut out bad air, exhaust
gases etc. from the passen-
ger compartment. The air in
the passenger compartment
is recirculated, i.e. no outside
air is taken into the car when
this function is activated. If the air in the car
recirculates for too long, there is a risk of mist-
ing on the insides of the windows.
Timer
The timer function reduces the risk of icing,
misting and bad air (if recirculation is selected).
To activate/deactivate the function see
page 83.
NOTE
When Defroster (4) is selected, recirculation
is always deactivated.
3. Air quality system*
Same button as recirculation.
The air quality system consists of a multi-filter
and a sensor. The filter separates gases and
particles to reduce the levels of odours and
pollution in the passenger compartment. When
the sensor detects polluted outside air, the air
intakes are closed and the air in the passenger
compartment is recirculated. A green light (A)
illuminates in the button when the air quality
sensor is active.
Activating the air quality sensor:
Press AUTO (1) to activate the air quality
sensor (normal setting).
Or:
Switch between three functions by press-
ing repeatedly the recirculation button.
Air quality sensor engaged – the light (A)
illuminates.
No recirculation engaged, provided it is not
required for cooling in hot weather – light
not illuminated.
Recirculation engaged – the light (M) illu-
minates.
Keep the following in mind:
As a rule, the air quality sensor should
always be engaged.
Recirculation is limited in cold weather to
avoid misting.
The defroster functions for the front, side
and rear windows can be used to demist
the windows.
4. Defroster
Used to quickly remove mist-
ing and ice from the wind-
screen and side windows. Air
flows to the windows at high
fan speed. The light in the
defroster button illuminates
when the function is active.
The following also takes place when the
defroster function is activated in order to pro-
vide maximum dehumidification in the passen-
ger compartment:
the air conditioning (AC) is automatically
switched on (can be switched off with the
AC button (6)
recirculation is automatically disengaged.
When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
5. Air distribution
The airflow can be distributed
to the windows, dashboard
vents or floor by pressing the
air distribution buttons.
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
99
A symbol on the display above the climate con-
trol panel and an illuminated light in the relevant
button indicate which function has been
selected.
Refer to the table on page 100.
6. AC – On/Off (ON/OFF)
ON: The air conditioning is on.
It is controlled by the system's
AUTO function. This way,
incoming air is cooled and
dehumidified.
OFF: Off
When the defroster function is activated the air
conditioning is automatically switched on (can
be switched off with the AC button).
NOTE
The climate control system's demisting
function with humidity sensor is significantly
reduced with the air conditioning in deacti-
vated mode (OFF), as well as with manually
selected air distribution and fan speed.
7 and 8. Heated front seats*
To activate front seat heating:
Higher heat:
Press the button once – both lights illumi-
nate.
Lower heat:
Press the button once – one light illumi-
nates.
Heat off:
Press the button three times – light not illu-
minated.
9. Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
Heating is used to quickly
remove misting and ice from
the rear window and door mir-
rors. Press the button once to
start simultaneous rear win-
dow and rearview mirror
defrosting. The function is
active if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
The function is switched off manually or auto-
matically. Switch off manually with one press
on the button. Automatic switching off discon-
nects the rear window and door mirrors after
12 – 20 minutes depending on outside tem-
perature.
During cold weather the defrosting* also con-
tinues after 20 minutes in order to keep the rear
window and door mirrors free of ice and mist.
The intensity of the defrosting can be adapted
to the outside temperature. This function must
be switched off manually.
10. Temperature selector
The temperatures on the
driver and passenger sides
can be set independently.
Press the button once to acti-
vate one side only. Press
again to activate the other
side. Press the button a third time to activate
both sides.
The active side is indicated by the button's light
and in the display above the climate control
panel.
When the car is started, the most recent setting
is resumed.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature than
the actual desired temperature.
03 Climate control
Air distribution
03
100
Air distribution Use: Air distribution Use:
Air to windows. Some air
flows from the air vents. The
air is not recirculated. Air
conditioning is always
engaged.
to remove ice and
misting quickly.
Air to the floor and windows.
Some air flows from the dash-
board air vents.
to ensure comfortable
conditions and good
demisting in cold or
humid weather.
Air to windscreen and side
windows. Some air flows
from the air vents.
to prevent misting
and icing in a cold and
humid climate. (Not
for low fan speed.)
Air to floor and from dash-
board air vents.
in sunny weather with
cool outside tempera-
tures.
Airflow to windows and from
dashboard air vents.
to ensure good com-
fort in warm, dry
weather.
Air to floor. Some air flows to
the dashboard air vents and
windows.
to warm the feet.
Airflow to the head and
chest from the dashboard
air vents.
to ensure efficient
cooling in warm
weather.
Airflow to windows, from
dashboard air vents and to
the floor.
to provide cooler air for
the feet or warmer air
to the upper body in
cold weather or hot,
dry weather.
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
101
General information about heaters
The parking heater heats the engine and pas-
senger compartment and can be started
directly or with the timer.
Two different times can be selected using the
timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car
is heated and ready. The car's electronic sys-
tem calculates when heating should be started
based on the outside temperature.
At -10 °C or lower the maximum running time
of the parking heater is 50 minutes.
WARNING
The car must be outdoors when the petrol
or diesel heater is used.
NOTE
When the parking heater is active there may
be smoke from underneath the car, which is
perfectly normal.
Refuelling
Warning decal on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-
ting to refuel.
Check on the information display that the
parking heater is switched off. When it is
running, the information display shows
PARK HEAT ON.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.
Battery and fuel
If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel
level is too low, the parking heater is switched
off automatically and a message appears on
the information display.
Acknowledge the message by pressing the
indicator stalk READ button once.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater com-
bined with short journeys may discharge the
battery and impair starting.
The car should be driven for the same time
as the heater is used to ensure that the car's
battery is recharged adequately to replace
the energy consumed by the heater when it
is used on a regular basis.
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
03
102
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Activating the heater
G029052
READ button
Thumbwheel
1
RESET button
1
Symbols and display messages
When one of the timer's settings or
Direct start is activated, the infor-
mation symbol in the combined
instrument panel illuminates and
the information display shows an
explanatory text.
Display Specification
FUEL HEATER ON
The heater is
switched on and
running.
TIMER IS SET FOR
FUEL HEATER
Reminder that the
heater will start at
the set time after the
car has been left,
when the remote
control key is
removed from the
ignition switch.
Display Specification
HEATER STOP-
PED LOW BAT-
TERY
The heater has been
stopped by the car's
electronics in order
to facilitate starting
the engine.
HEATER STOP-
PED LOW FUEL
LEVEL
The heater has been
stopped by the car's
electronics in order
to facilitate starting
the engine as well as
50 km driving.
Direct start and immediate stop
1.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to
DIRECT
START PARK HEAT OFF
or DIRECT
START PARK HEAT ON
.
2.
Long presses on the RESET button
change between the two alternatives.
DIRECT START PARK HEAT ON: Parking
heater switched on manually or with pro-
grammed timer.
DIRECT START PARK HEAT OFF: Parking
heater switched off.
1
No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
103
With the direct start of the heater it will be acti-
vated for 50 minutes.
Heating of the passenger compartment will
begin as soon as the engine coolant has
reached the correct temperature.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while the
parking heater is running.
Setting the timer
The time when the car shall be used and heated
is specified with the timer.
Select between
TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.
1.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to
PARK
HEAT TIMER --:-- ON
.
2. Give a long press (approx. 2 seconds) on
the RESET button in order to access the
flashing time setting.
3. Select the required hour using the thumb-
wheel.
4.
Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-
ing minutes setting.
5. Select the required minute using the
thumbwheel.
6.
Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.
7.
Press RESET to activate the timer.
After setting
TIMER 1 a second start time can
be programmed with
TIMER 2 by scrolling with
the thumbwheel.
Set the alternative time in the same way as
TIMER 1.
Deactivating a timer-started heater
A timer-started heater can be switched off
manually before the set time has elapsed. Pro-
ceed as follows:
1.
Press the READ button.
2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text
PARK HEAT TIMER 1 or PARK HEAT
TIMER 2
.
The text
ON flashes on the display.
3.
Press RESET.
The text
OFF is shown with a constant
glow and the heater is switched OFF.
A timer-started heater can be switched off in
accordance with the instructions in the section
"Direct start and immediate stop".
Clock/timer
The heater's time is connected to the car's
clock.
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset.
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)
03
104
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Auxiliary heater (diesel)
In diesel-engined cars the auxiliary heater may
be required for achieving the correct tempera-
ture in the engine and passenger compartment
during cold weather.
The heater starts automatically when extra
heat is required when the engine is running.
The heater is switched off automatically when
the correct temperature is reached or when the
engine is switched off.
NOTE
The auxiliary heater cannot be switched on
or off manually but is only controlled by the
car's electronics.
When the auxiliary heater is active there may
be smoke from underneath the car, which is
perfectly normal.
03 Climate control
03
105
106
Front seats............................................................................................ 108
Interior lighting...................................................................................... 111
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment................................... 114
Rear seat............................................................................................... 118
Cargo area............................................................................................ 120
INTERIOR
04 Interior
Front seats
04
108
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Seating position, manual seat
The driver's and passenger seats can be
adjusted to the optimum sitting and driving
positions.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust
the distance to the steering wheel and ped-
als. Check that the seat is locked after
changing the position setting.
Raise/lower the front of the seat cushion
(driver's and passenger seat*), pump up/
down.
Raise/lower the seat (driver's and passen-
ger seat*), pump up/down.
Lumbar support
1
(driver's and passenger
seat*), turn the wheel.
Backrest rake: turn the wheel.
Control panel for power seat*.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat and
adjust the seatbelt, see page 16, before set-
ting off, never while driving.
Check that the seat is locked in position.
Seating position, power seat*
G020199
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time
after unlocking the door with the remote con-
trol key without the key being inserted into the
ignition switch. The seat can always be
adjusted in key position I or II.
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat, forwards/backwards
Seat, up/down
Backrest rake
An overload protection is deployed if one of the
seats is blocked. If this happens, turn off the
ignition and wait a short time before adjusting
the seat again. Only one of the seat's settings
can be adjusted at a time.
1
Also applies to power seat.
04 Interior
Front seats
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
109
Memory function
G020200
Buttons for memory function.
Store setting
1. Adjust seat.
2.
Press and hold button M while pressing
button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously.
Using a stored setting
Press one of the memory buttons 13 until the
seat stops. If you release the button then the
movement of the seat will stop.
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
one of the setting buttons for the seat or mem-
ory buttons in order to stop the seat.
WARNING
Risk of crushing. Make sure that children do
not play with the controls.
Check that there are no objects in front of,
behind or under the seat during adjustment.
Ensure that none of the rear seat passen-
gers is in danger of becoming trapped.
Memory in remote control key
The settings for the driver's seat are stored in
the memory for the remote control key with
which the car is locked. When the car is
unlocked with the same remote control key the
driver's seat adopts the stored settings when
the driver's door is opened.
NOTE
The remote control key memory is inde-
pendent of seat memory.
Tipping the front seat backrest*
The passenger seat backrest can be folded
forward to make room for long loads.
1. Move the seat as far back as possible.
2. Adjust the backrest to an upright position
90 degrees.
3. Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest
while folding it forwards.
4. Push the seat forward so that the head
restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
04 Interior
Front seats
04
110
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Inlaid mats*
Volvo supplies inlay mats which are especially
produced for your car.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat
in the driver area is firmly affixed and
secured in the pins in order to avoid getting
caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
111
Reading lamps and interior lighting
G020201
Controls in roof console for front reading lamps
and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp left-hand, On/Off
Interior lighting
Reading lamp right-hand, On/Off
All lighting in the passenger compartment can
be switched on in key position I and II as well
as when the engine is running. The lighting can
also be activated within 30 minutes after:
the engine has been switched off and the
remote control key is in position 0
the car has been unlocked but the engine
has not been started.
Front roof lighting
The front reading lamps are switched on or off
by pressing the relevant button in the roof con-
sole.
Rear roof lighting
G030855
Reading lamps, rear.
Reading lamp left-hand rear, On/Off
Reading lamp right-hand rear, On/Off
The lamps are switched on or off by pressing
the relevant button.
Courtesy lighting
Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart-
ment lighting) is switched on and off respec-
tively when a side door is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror*
G020210
The lamp is automatically switched on and off
respectively when the cover is opened or
closed.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
112
Cargo area lighting
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on
and off respectively when the tailgate is
opened or closed.
Automatic lighting
Using the switch (2), see page 111, three posi-
tions can be selected for the lighting the pas-
senger compartment:
Off – right-hand side (marked with 0)
depressed, automatic lighting switched
off.
Neutral position – automatic lighting acti-
vated. The dimmer function is active.
On – left-hand side depressed, passenger
compartment lighting on.
Neutral position
When the switch (2) is in neutral position pas-
senger compartment lighting is switched on
and off automatically in accordance with the
below.
The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
the car is unlocked with the remote control
key or key blade.
the engine is stopped and the remote con-
trol key is turned to position 0.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched
off when:
the engine is started
the car is locked with the key or remote
control key.
Passenger compartment lighting comes on
and remains on for 5 minutes if one of the doors
is open.
If any lighting is switched on manually and the
car is locked then it will be switched off auto-
matically after 5 minutes.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
113
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
114
Storage spaces
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
115
Storage pocket on rear of front seats.
Storage compartment in door panel with
cup holder.
Ticket clip
Storage pocket on front edge of front seat
cushions.
Glovebox
Storage compartment (e.g. for CD discs
and cup holder,*) and storage compart-
ment behind the centre console.
Bottle holder*
Coat hanger, only for light garments.
Storage compartment and cup holder.
Storage pocket* on front edge of centre
rear seat cushion.
WARNING
Ensure that no hard, sharp or heavy objects
lie or protrude in such a way that they could
cause injury during heavy braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects with
a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Glovebox
G024208
The owner's manual and maps can be kept
here for example. There are also holders for
coins, pens and fuel cards.
The glovebox can be locked with the remote
control key's detachable key blade. Further
information is available on page 127.
Coat hanger
The coat hanger is located on the passenger
seat head restraint. Only hang light garments
on the hanger.
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
116
Storage under the front armrest
G018371
There is a storage space under the armrest.
There is also a smaller storage space in the
detachable armrest. Press the small button
and lift the armrest to open the shallow com-
partment. Press the large button and lift the
armrest to open the deeper compartment.
G026704
In the deeper compartment there is space for
10 normal CD cases. The cases must be stored
vertically on the top edge for all 10 to have
space.
Cup holder in centre console
G018372
There is space for a double cup holder under
the roller cover. The space can be used for
storage by lifting out the cup holder. Lift at the
rear edge of the cup holder where there is a
recess.
If the cup holder is being fitted - first align its
two guide lugs in the two recesses in the front
edge of the space and then press down the
rear edge of the cup holder.
Close the roller cover by gripping its front edge
from below and pulling forward.
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
117
Storage compartment behind the gear
lever
When there are no buttons for parking assis-
tance and BLIS, see page 173 and page
175, the space can be used as a storage com-
partment.
WARNING
Objects placed in the storage compart-
ments must not obstruct the parking brake
lever when it is applied.
Bottle holder*
G017441
A bottle holder for larger bottles is located on
the rear of the tunnel console.
Ashtray*
G019622
An ashtray is located towards the rear of the
tunnel console.
Open the ashtray by pulling the top edge of the
cover.
Emptying the ashtray:
1. Press in the catch, see preceding illustra-
tion, and tilt the cover up.
2. Then lift the ashtray out.
04 Interior
Rear seat
04
118
Head restraint, rear
All head restraints can be adjusted vertically to
suit the height of the passenger. The upper
edge of the head restraint should be aligned
with middle of the back of the head. Raise the
head restraint as necessary.
To lower the head restraint, press the button by
the right-hand pillar at the same time as push-
ing down the head restraint. To remove the
head restraint, the button by the right-hand pil-
lar must be pressed while lifting out the head
restraint.
Tipping the rear seat backrest
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down. The
seat belts must not be connected either.
Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the
rear seat upholstery.
Lowering the backrest.
Rear edge of seat cushion
Lock catch
Lowering the backrest
Location of head restraint under seat cush-
ion
IMPORTANT
The head restraints could be damaged if
they are not removed for loading. The head
restraint in the centre must also be removed
for heavy loads.
G020790
The rear seat backrests can be tipped forwards
together, or individually, to make it easier to
transport long objects. To avoid damaging the
seatbelts when folding the backrests up or
down, these should be hooked onto the grab
handles.
1. Hang the seatbelts on the hooks before
lowering or raising the backrests.
04 Interior
Rear seat
04
119
2. Lift the rear edge of the seat cushion (1) to
fold the seat cushions forward.
3. Pull the lock (2) catch up and forward to
release the backrest. A red indicator on the
lock catch shows that the backrest is no
longer locked in place.
4. Fold the backrests (3) forward halfway and
remove the head restraints on the outside
seats. The centre seat's head restraint
must be removed for a fully level floor.
5. Place the head restraints in the plastic
sleeves on the undersides (4) of the raised
seat cushions.
NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator should no longer be showing. If it
is still showing then the backrest is not
locked in place.
WARNING
Remember to take down the seatbelts once
you have raised the backrest.
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
120
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Safety net*
G020768
The retractable safety net storage cassette is
mounted on the rear of the backrest.
Using the safety net with raised
backrests.
1. Pull out the safety net horizontally back-
ward. Extend the right hand attachment
and hold it extended. Insert the attachment
into the rear keyed notch in the roof panel.
Then press the attachment forward to the
front notch. The attachment must be
pressed so far that the flange rides over the
restriction between the front and rear
notches.
2. Do the same on the other side. The attach-
ments on the net spring shut. Pull the net
over towards the left bracket to fit it in
place.
3. Check that the attachments on the safety
net are securely fastened in the keyed
recesses in the roof panel.
Using the safety net with lowered
backrests
The safety net can also be used when the back-
rests are lowered. In this case, use the front
attachment points in the roof panel.
Removing the safety net
1. Pull one of the net's attachments rearward
to the large notch and pull it out.
2. Detach the other attachment in the same
way.
Removing the safety net storage
cassette.
1. Lower the entire backrest.
2. Press the cassette outward to release it
from the mounting brackets.
WARNING
Loads in the cargo area must be firmly
secured even if the safety net is correctly
fitted.
Safety grille*
G014730
The safety grille is designed to help prevent
loads or pets from being thrown forward in the
passenger compartment in the event of sud-
den braking. For safety reasons, the grille must
always be correctly fastened and secured.
Folding up
If the safety grille is in the way it can be folded
up to the roof:
1. Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille.
2. Pull straight backward and upward. Then
release. The gas struts prevent the grille
from dropping down.
To fold down the grille, do the reverse.
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
121
Removing
Remove the safety grille as follows:
1. Fold the rear seat backrest forward slightly
(to relieve the load from the gas struts).
2. Remove the caps from the nuts on either
side that secure the safety grille.
3. Unscrew the nuts until the threads are flush
with the edge of the nuts.
4. Turn the grille backward in the car slightly
to release it from the trim. Do not angle the
grille too much as it can become wedged,
making it difficult to pull out.
5. Repeat for the other mounting and then
carefully lift the grille out of the car.
Attaching
To fit the safety grille:
1. Follow the instructions in the reverse order.
2. Tighten the two nuts to 24 Nm.
In the event of uncertainty about attaching or
removing the safety grille, consult a workshop
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Cargo cover*
G020766
Cargo cover.
Fitting the cargo cover.
Fit the cargo cover as follows:
1. Move the front section of the cargo cover
backwards/over the cassette.
2. Following which, fit the cargo cover in its
tracks along the side panels, furthest into
the cargo area.
3. Push the button forward so that the
catches are retracted. Following which,
press the cargo cover down in the track.
4. The button springs back when the cargo
cover is correctly located.
5. Repeat the procedure on the opposite
side.
G020767
6. Check that the cargo cover is fitted firmly
in the cargo area.
7. Fit the front section of the cargo cover in
the wedge shaped tracks on the side pan-
els, against the rear seat.
8. The cargo cover is now ready for use.
WARNING
Do not place objects on the cargo cover or
on its front section.
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
122
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Use
Pull the cargo cover over the cargo area and
hook it into the tracks in the rear pillars in the
cargo area.
Removing the cargo cover.
1. Lift up the front section of the cargo cover,
move it backwards and then allow it to
hang free.
2. Move the button forwards, lift up one end
of the cargo cover. Repeat on the opposite
side. Following which, pull out the cargo
cover.
Using the safety net together with the
cargo cover
G020769
1. Tip the backrests slightly forward to
access the safety net cassette. Start with
the 40% section.
2. Extend the safety net rearward.
3. Fold the backrests back up.
4. Hook the net into the attachment points in
the roof panel as described for raised
backrests.
NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator should no longer be showing. If it
is still showing then the backrest is not
locked in place.
Load retaining eyelets*
G014757
The load retaining eyelets are used to fasten
straps or nets to anchor items in the cargo
area.
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
123
Electrical socket in cargo area*
Fold down the cover to access the electrical
socket. This socket works regardless of
whether or not the ignition is on.
NOTE
Remember that using the electrical socket
with the engine switched off involves the
risk of discharging the car's battery.
Bag holder*
G014756
The bag holder holds shopping bags in place
and prevents them from tipping over and spill-
ing their contents in the cargo area.
1. Open the hatch in the cargo area.
2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap.
124
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remote control key with key blade....................................................... 126
Active locks........................................................................................... 129
Keyless drive*........................................................................................ 130
Battery in remote control key................................................................ 133
Locking and unlocking.......................................................................... 134
Child safety locks.................................................................................. 137
Alarm*.................................................................................................... 138
LOCKS AND ALARM
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade
05
126
Remote control key
The car is supplied with 2 remote control keys.
The remote control keys contain detachable
metal key blades for mechanical locking/
unlocking of the driver's door and glovebox.
The key blades' unique code is available at
authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec-
ommended for ordering new key blades.
A maximum of 6 remote control keys/key
blades can be programmed and used for one
single car.
Turn signal indication during locking/
unlocking
When the car is unlocked using the remote
control key or Keyless drive system, two short
flashes of the direction indicators serve to indi-
cate that unlocking was correctly performed.
For locking, the indication takes place with one
long flash and only if all locks are locked, after
the doors and the tailgate have been closed.
Personal preferences in the menu system can
be used to the deactivate indication via the
direction indicators. There will then be no visual
indication as to whether the lock status is cor-
rect, see page 84.
Loss of a remote control key
If you lose a remote control key, take the car
and the other remote control keys to a Volvo
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended. The code of the missing
remote control key must be erased from the
system as a theft prevention measure.
Immobiliser
The remote control keys are fitted with coded
chips. The code must be accepted by the
reader (receiver) in the ignition switch. The
engine can only be started if the correct remote
control key with the correct code is used.
Remote control key functions
G019402
Locking – Locks all doors and the tailgate.
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also
close the side windows and the sunroof.
WARNING
If the sunroof and windows are closed using
the remote control key, check that no one is
in danger of getting hands caught.
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
127
Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and the
tailgate. Press and hold (at least 4 seconds)
to also open the side windows.
Approach lighting – Switches on the light-
ing at a distance – lights up the area around
a car parked in a dark location. Press the
button once to switch on the interior light-
ing, position/parking lamps, number plate
lighting and door mirror lamps (option). The
lighting is switched off automatically after
30, 60 or 90 seconds. For information on
setting the delay time, see page 84.
Tailgate – Press the button once to unlock
the tailgate only
1
.
Panic function – Used to attract attention
in an emergency. Press and hold the red
button for at least 3 seconds or press i
t twice within 3 seconds to activate the
direction indicators and the horn. The
alarm can be deactivated with the same
button, after having been armed for at least
5 seconds. Otherwise the function
switches off automatically after 30 sec-
onds.
IMPORTANT
The narrow section of the remote control
key is particularly sensitive - this contains
the chip. The engine cannot be started if the
chip is damaged.
Detachable key blade
G019403
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade:
the driver's door can be opened manually
if central locking cannot be activated with
the remote control key, see page 131.
access to the glovebox can be
blocked,see page 128.
the rear doors' mechanical child safety
locks can be activated/deactivated, see
page 137.
PACOS* activated/deactivated, see
page 22.
Removing the key blade
To remove the key blade from the remote con-
trol key:
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
Pull out the key blade at the same time.
Attaching the key blade
Be careful when inserting the key blade into the
remote control key.
1. Hold the remote control key with the nar-
row end pointing down and lower the key
blade into its slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade to lock it in
position. You should hear a "click".
1
The function unlocks the boot lid – it does not open.
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade
05
128
Unlocking doors with the key blade
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis-
charged, then the driver's door can be
unlocked and opened as follows:
1. Insert the key blade in the driver's door
keyhole.
2. Turn the blade 45 degrees clockwise and
open the door.
See also the figure and further information on
page 131.
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-
gered. It is switched off by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch, see
page 139.
Locking the glovebox
G020034
The glovebox is locked.
The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked
using the remote control key's detachable key
blade. (For information on the key blade, see
page 127.)
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked
position.
Pull out the key blade.
Unlocking takes place in reverse order.
NOTE
The remote control key cannot unlock the
glovebox without the key blade.
This function is particularly useful for when
the car is left for service, at a hotel or similar.
05 Locks and alarm
Active locks
05
129
G019450
Active locks for remote control key with
key blade.
Active locks for remote control key with-
out key blade.
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
05
130
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Keyless lock and ignition system
G019451
Keyless function range
The keyless drive system allows the car to be
unlocked, driven and locked without the need
for a key. You simply need to have the remote
control key with you in a pocket or a bag.
The system makes it easier and more conven-
ient to open the car, for example with shopping
bags in one hand and a child in the other. It
saves you having to take out or look for the
remote control key.
The two remote control keys incorporate the
keyless drive function. You can order addi-
tional remote controls. The keyless drive sys-
tem can handle up to six remote controls.
Remote control key max. 1.5 m from the
car
In order to open a door or the tailgate, a remote
control key must be no more than approx.
1.5 m from the car door handle or tailgate.
This means that the person who wishes to
open a door must have the remote control key
with him or her. It is not possible to open a door
if the remote control key is on the other side of
the car.
The grey area in the illustration indicates the
range covered by the system's antennas.
If someone leaves the car and takes a keyless
drive remote control key with them, a warning
message appears on the information display
and a reminder signal sounds. The warning
message disappears when the remote control
key is brought back to the car or when the igni-
tion dial is turned to position 0. The warning is
only issued if the ignition dial is in position I or
II after someone has opened and closed a
door.
The warning message and reminder signal dis-
appear when the remote control key is brought
back to the car after one of the following
actions:
a door has been opened and closed
the ignition dial has been turned to position
0
the READ button has been pressed.
Never leave any remote control key in the
car
If a remote control key with keyless drive func-
tion is left in the car, it is made passive when
the car is locked. This prevents unauthorised
entry.
If someone breaks into the car and finds the
remote control key, it can be activated and
used again. It is therefore important to handle
all remote control keys with equal care.
Interference to remote control key
function
Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter-
fere with the keyless drive system.
NOTE
Do not place/store the remote control key
near a mobile phone or metal object - no
closer than 10-15 cm.
If interference is experienced nonetheless, use
the remote control key and key blade in the
normal way, see page 126.
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
131
Locking
G020033
Cars with the keyless system have a button on the
outside door handles.
When the remote control key is within the range
covered by the system's antennas, the doors
and the tailgate are locked as follows:
Push in the lock button on one of the door
handles.
All doors must be closed before the lock button
is pushed in. Otherwise they will not lock.
When the car is locked, the lock buttons on the
inside of the doors retract.
NOTE
On cars with the keyless drive system and
automatic transmission the gear selector
must be moved to the P position and the
ignition dial turned to the 0 position. Other-
wise the car cannot be locked or alarmed.
Unlocking
When the remote control key is within the range
covered by the system's antennas:
1. Open the doors by pulling the relevant han-
dle.
2. Open the tailgate by pressing under the
tailgate opening button and lift the tailgate.
If for some reason the keyless drive function in
the remote control key is not operating, the car
can be unlocked using the remote control key
functions, see page 126.
Power seat – remote control key with
memory function
If several people with keyless drive remote
control keys get into the car, then the driver's
seat will be adjusted for the person who opens
the door first.
Unlocking doors with the key blade
G020225
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis-
charged, then the driver's door can be opened
as follows:
1. To access the keyhole: Carefully prize out
the plastic cover in the handle by inserting
the key blade in the hole on the bottom of
the cover.
2. Unlock the door using the key blade.
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
05
132
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-
gered. It is switched off by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch, see
page 139.
Antenna location
G020074
The keyless system has a number of integrated
antennae located around the car:
Rear bumper, inside centre
Door handle, left-hand rear
Cargo area, central and furthest in under
the floor
Door handle, right-hand rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should
not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless
system's antennae with their pacemaker.
This is to prevent interference between the
pacemaker and the keyless system.
Personal preferences
The Keyless Drive system can have personal
preferences applied, see page 84.
05 Locks and alarm
Battery in remote control key
05
133
Low battery in remote control key
When the battery runs down and full function-
ality cannot be guaranteed, the information
symbol
and display show KEY BATTERY
LOW VOLTAGE
or REMOTE BATTERY
LOW VOLTAGE
.
Changing the remote control key
battery
G019406
If the locks repeatedly fail to respond to signals
from the remote control key at a normal dis-
tance, the battery should be replaced
(type CR 2450, 3 V).
1. Place the remote control key with the key-
pad downward and prize up the cover
using a small screwdriver.
2. Remove the cover.
3.
Carefully examine how the battery's (+) and
() sides are fitted (there is a diagram under
the cover).
4. Prize out and change the battery. Avoid
touching the battery and its terminals with
your fingers.
5. Refit the cover and press it in.
> Dispose of the old battery in an environ-
mentally-responsible manner.
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
134
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Locking/unlocking the car from
outside
For cars with the Keyless system, see
page 130.
Unlocking
Using the remote control key's unlock button
the car can be unlocked in two different ways
(select in personal settings, see page 84):
One press unlocks the doors and the tail-
gate
One press unlocks the driver's door and a
second press unlocks the other doors and
the tailgate.
Locking
The remote control key's lock button locks the
doors and tailgate simultaneously.
NOTE
The car can be locked even if the tailgate is
open - when the tailgate is then closed there
is a risk that the keys will be locked in*.
WARNING
Be aware of the risk of being locked in the
car when it is locked from the outside using
the remote control key - it is then not pos-
sible to open any of the doors from the
inside with the door controls. Read more
about this in the section "Deadlocks" later
on.
Rapid closing
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) on the
remote control key's lock button to close all
windows and sunroof* at the same time.
Tailgate
Unlocking
Unlocking tailgate only:
Press the remote control key's button to
unlock the tailgate.
Locking
If the doors are locked when the tailgate is
closed then it remains unlocked. Lock with the
remote control key's lock button or from inside
with the central locking button in order to lock
both doors and the tailgate.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked
again automatically (does not apply to locking
from inside). This function reduces the risk that
the car is left unlocked unintentionally. (For
cars with alarm, see page 139.)
Locking/unlocking the car from inside
G007451
With the central locking button on the driver's
door, the doors and tailgate can be locked or
unlocked simultaneously.
Unlocking
A door cannot be unlocked by pulling up its
lock button.
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
135
Press the upper section of the central lock-
ing button
.
Global opening
Press the upper section of the central lock-
ing button
.
A long press (at least 4 seconds) also
opens all the side windows simultaneously
- for example, to quickly ventilate the pas-
senger compartment during hot weather.
Locking
Press the lower section of the central lock-
ing button
.
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also
close all windows and the sunroof* at the
same time.
All doors can be locked with each respective
door's lock button.
Opening the doors
When the doors are locked from the inside:
Pull the handle twice to unlock and open
the door.
Automatic locking
When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h the
doors and tailgate are locked automatically.
When the function is activated and the doors
have been locked they can be opened in two
ways:
Pull one of the door handles twice
Press the upper section of the central lock-
ing button
and pull the door handle.
The function can be activated/deactivated by
means of personal preferences, see page 84.
Deadlocks*
1
When deadlocked, the doors cannot be
opened from the inside if they are locked with
the remote control key.
The deadlocks are activated with the remote
control key and are set after a 10-25 second
delay after the doors have been locked.
The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock
state with the remote control key. The driver's
door can also be unlocked manually with the
remote control key's detachable key blade -
see page 127.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the deadlocks in
order to avoid the risk of anyone being
locked in.
Temporary deactivation
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
the deadlocks function can be temporarily
switched off.
1
Only in combination with alarm.
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
136
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
Display
MENU
EXIT
ENTER
Navigation
Deactivation is carried out as follows:
1.
Access the menu system under
CAR
SETTINGS
(for a detailed description of
the menu system, see page 84).
2.
Select
REDUCED GUARD.
3.
Select
Activate once: The instrument
panel display shows the message
REDUCED GUARD SEE MANUAL and
the deadlocks function is switched off
when the car is locked.
or
Select
Ask on exit: Each time the key is
turned to position 0 the audio system dis-
play shows the message
Reduced guard
ask on exit Press ENTER to reduce
guard until engine is started Press EXIT
to cancel
- select one of the options:
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
If the deadlocks function shall be switched
off: Press ENTER and lock the car. Note
that the alarm's* movement and tilt detec-
tors are switched off at the same time, see
page 139.
The next time the remote control key is turned
to key position II the system is reset to zero and
the instrument panel display shows the mes-
sage
FULL GUARD at which the deadlocks
function and the alarm's movement and tilt
detectors* are re-engaged.
or
If the locking system shall not be changed:
Select no options at all and lock the car. Or
press EXIT and lock the car.
05 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
137
Manual select, child lock, rear doors
G014697
Manual child lock in left-hand rear door.
The door cannot be opened from inside.
The door can be opened from inside.
The child safety lock controls are found on the
trailing edge of the rear doors and are only
accessible when the doors are open.
To activate or deactivate the child safety locks:
1. Remove the remote control key's key
blade.
2. Turn the control using the key blade.
Electrical locking of the rear doors and
power windows*
Driver's door control panel.
When the electric child safety lock is active
then the rear:
windows can only be opened with the driv-
er's door control panel
doors cannot be opened from inside.
1. Child safety locks are activated in key posi-
tion I or II.
2. Press the switch on the driver's door.
A message appears on the information dis-
play.
The lamp in the button illuminates when the
lock is active.
NOTE
Cars with electric child safety locks do not
also have manual child locks.
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
05
138
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Alarm system
When the alarm is armed, it continually moni-
tors all alarm inputs.
The alarm is triggered if:
a door, the bonnet or tailgate opens
a non-approved key is used in the ignition
or if an attempt is made to force the lock
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector)
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted
with a tilt detector)
the battery's cable is disconnected
anyone tries to disconnect the siren.
Alarm indicator
G020227
A red LED on the top of the instrument panel
indicates the alarm system's status:
LED not lit – the alarm is not armed.
The LED flashes once every other second
– Alarm is armed.
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the
alarm and until key position II is activated
– the alarm has been triggered.
If there is a fault in the alarm system, a message
appears on the display. At which point you
should contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm
system components. All such attempts
could affect the terms of insurance.
Arming the alarm
Press the remote control key lock button.
A long flash from the car's direction indi-
cators confirms that the alarm is armed
and that the doors are locked.
IMPORTANT
The alarm is fully armed when the car's
direction indicators have made one long
flash and the LED on the instrument panel
flashes once every other second.
Disarming the alarm
Press the remote control key unlock but-
ton. Two short flashes from the car's direc-
tion indicators confirm that the alarm is
disarmed and that the doors are unlocked.
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
05
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
139
Automatic re-arming of the alarm
This function prevents the car being left with
the alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the
doors or the tailgate is opened within 2
minutes, then the alarm is automatically re-
armed. The car is relocked at the same time.
Deactivating a triggered alarm
Press the unlock button on the remote
control key or insert the key in the ignition
switch.
Confirmation is given by two short flashes from
the direction indicators.
If the remote control key's batteries are dis-
charged then the alarm can be deactivated by
unlocking the driver's door manually, inserting
the remote control key in the ignition switch
and turning it to key position II.
Remote control key not working
G019420
If the alarm cannot be deactivated with the
remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery is
discharged - the car can be unlocked, dis-
armed and the engine started as follows:
1. Open the driver's door with the detachable
key blade. The alarm is triggered and the
siren sounds.
2. On cars with the keyless drive system: First
remove the knob by pressing in the
catch (1) and pulling out (2).
3. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch (3). The alarm is deactivated. The
alarm light flashes rapidly until the remote
control key is turned to key position II.
Alarm signals
When the alarm is triggered, the following hap-
pens:
A siren sounds for 25 seconds or until the
alarm is deactivated. The siren has its own
battery and works independently of the car
battery.
The direction indicators flash for
5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off.
Reduced alarm level
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm -
e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during
transport on a car train or car ferry - the move-
ment and tilt detectors should be temporarily
deactivated.
The procedure is the same as with the tempo-
rary disengaging of deadlocks - see page 135
Testing the alarm system
Testing the movement detector* in the
passenger compartment
1. Open all the windows.
2. Engage the alarm function with the remote
control key's lock button. Active alarm
function is confirmed with a slowly flashing
alarm indicator.
3. Please wait 30 seconds.
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
05
140
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
4. Test the movement detector by lifting out
a bag from a seat for example.
> A siren should sound and all direction
indicators should flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control key.
Test of alarm for doors
1. Engage the alarm function with the remote
control key's lock button.
2. Please wait 30 seconds.
3. Unlock the driver's door with the detacha-
ble key blade.
4. Open one of the doors.
> A siren should sound and all direction
indicators should flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control key.
Test of alarm for bonnet
1. Sit in the car and deactivate the movement
detector, see the previous section
"Reduced alarm level".
2. Remain sitting in the car and engage the
alarm function with the remote control
key's lock button.
3. Please wait 30 seconds.
4. Open the bonnet with the handle under the
dashboard.
> A siren should sound and all direction
indicators should flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control key.
05 Locks and alarm
05
141
142
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General.................................................................................................. 144
Refuelling.............................................................................................. 146
Alcolock*............................................................................................... 150
Starting the engine................................................................................ 154
Starting the engine – Flexifuel............................................................... 156
Keyless drive*........................................................................................ 158
Manual gearbox.................................................................................... 159
Automatic gearbox................................................................................ 160
DRIVe Start-Stop*................................................................................. 165
Brake system........................................................................................ 169
DSTC – Stability and traction control system*...................................... 171
Park Assist*........................................................................................... 173
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System................................................ 175
Towing and recovery............................................................................. 178
Start assistance.................................................................................... 181
Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 182
Towing equipment*............................................................................... 184
Detachable towbar* ............................................................................. 186
Loading................................................................................................. 190
Adjusting headlamp pattern.................................................................. 191
STARTING AND DRIVING
06 Starting and driving
General
06
144
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Economical driving
Driving economically means driving smoothly
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving
style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted
to the current traffic situation and road -
lower engine speeds result in lower fuel
consumption.
Avoid driving with open windows.
Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration
and heavy braking.
Remove unnecessary items from the car -
the greater the load the higher the fuel con-
sumption.
Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
A roof load and ski box increase air resis-
tance, leading to higher fuel consumption
- remove the load carriers when not in use.
Do not run the engine to operating tem-
perature at idling speed, but rather drive
with a light load as soon as possible - a
cold engine consumes more fuel than a
warm one.
Cars with the D2 engine and 6-speed man-
ual transmission with Start/Stop* are
started in 2nd gear under normal condi-
tions on level ground.
For more information and further advice, see
the pages 13 and 298.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important
systems such as the power steering and
brake servo.
Driving in water
The car can be driven through water at a maxi-
mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of
10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised
when passing through flowing water.
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters
the air filter.
In greater depths, water can enter the trans-
mission. This reduces the lubricating ability
of the oils and shortens the service life of the
systems.
When driving in water, maintain a low speed
and do not stop the car. When the water has
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly
and check that full brake function is achieved.
Water and mud for example can make the
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake
function.
Clean the electric contacts of the electric
engine block heater and trailer coupling
after driving in water and mud.
IMPORTANT
Do not let the car stand with water over the
sills for any long period of time. This could
cause electrical malfunctions.
In the event of stalling in water, do not try to
restart. Tow the car from the water.
Engine, gearbox and cooling system
Under special conditions, for example hard
driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is
a risk that the engine and drive system may
overheat - in particular with a heavy load.
For supplementary information about over-
heating when driving with a trailer - see
page 182.
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
of the grille when driving in hot climates.
In the event of a risk of overheating a built-
in protection function in the gearbox is acti-
vated which, amongst other things, illumi-
nates the instrument panel's yellow infor-
mation lamp and there is a text message
06 Starting and driving
General
06
145
displayed there regarding appropriate
action - follow the recommendation given.
If the temperature gauge for the engine's
cooling system goes into the red zone -
stop and let the engine idle for a few
minutes.
If the car overheats, the air conditioning
may be switched off temporarily.
Do not turn the engine off immediately you
stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a while after the engine has been
switched off.
Diesel engine
When driving under heavy load in a hot climate,
the engine cooling fan can be replaced with
one of a greater capacity than the standard
model
1
. Check with your nearest Volvo dealer
regarding the options for your car.
Open tailgate
WARNING
Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic
exhaust fumes can be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
Do not overload the battery
The electrical functions in the car load the bat-
tery to varying degrees. Avoid having the
remote control key in key position II when the
engine is switched off. Instead use the I mode
- which uses less power.
Note that the 12 volt outlet in the cargo area
supplies power even when the remote control
key has been removed from the ignition switch.
Also, be aware of different accessories that
load the electrical system. Do not use functions
which use a lot of power when the engine is
switched off. Examples of such functions are:
ventilation fan
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume)
headlamps.
If the battery voltage is low the information dis-
play shows the text
LOW BATTERY POWER
SAVE MODE
. The energy-saving function
then shuts down certain functions or reduces
certain functions such as the ventilation fan
and/or audio system.
In which case, charge the battery by star-
ting the engine and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - battery charging is more
effective during driving than running the
engine at idling speed while stationary.
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
reacts.
1
For certain engines.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
146
Opening the fuel filler flap
Don not forget to switch off the fuel-driven heater
before refuelling!
Open the fuel filler flap with the button on the
lighting panel, see page 61. The engine must
be switched off before the flap can be opened.
The fuel flap is located on the rear right wing.
Closing
Push in the flap until you hear a click.
Fuel cap
1. Turn the fuel cap until an obvious resis-
tance is felt.
2. Turn past the resistance until it comes to a
stop.
3. Take out the cap.
4. Hang up the cap on the inside of the fuel
filler flap.
NOTE
Put the petrol cap back on after refuelling.
Turn until one or more clear clicks are heard.
Filling up with fuel
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump
nozzle cuts out.
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
Fuel of a lower quality than that specified
should not be used as engine power and fuel
consumption could be negatively affected, for
more information see the following section
Fuel.
General information on fuel
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get-
ting fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,
bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel
are highly toxic and could cause permanent
injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical
attention immediately if fuel has been swal-
lowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills on to the ground can be
ignited by the exhaust fumes.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-
ting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could cause
spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes,
leading to fire and injury.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
147
IMPORTANT
Mixing different types of fuel or the use of
fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's
guarantees, and any associated service
agreement. This applies to all engines.
NOTE: It does not apply to cars with engines
that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).
For information on fuel consumption, CO
2
emissions and tank volume - see page 298.
Catalytic converter
The purpose of the catalytic converter is to
purify exhaust gases. It is located in the flow of
exhaust gases close to the engine so that it
quickly reaches operating temperature. The
catalytic converter consists of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho-
dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts,
i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem-
ical reaction without being used up them-
selves.
Lambda-sond
TM
oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel
economy.
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content
of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This
value is fed into an electronic system that con-
tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel
to air directed to the engine is continuously
adjusted. These adjustments create optimal
conditions for efficient combustion of harmful
emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide
and nitrous oxides) using the three-way cata-
lytic converter.
Petrol
Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most
engines can be run with octane ratings of 91,
95 and 98 RON.
91 RON must not be used for 4-cylinder
engines and should only be used in excep-
tional cases with other engines.
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
98 RON is recommended for optimum per-
formance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C,
fuel with the highest possible octane rating is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
IMPORTANT
Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as
not to damage the catalytic converter.
Do not use additives not recommended
by Volvo.
Bioethanol E85
Do not modify the fuel system or its compo-
nents, and do not replace components with
parts that are not specifically designed for use
with bioethanol.
WARNING
Methanol must not be used. A decal on the
inside of the fuel filler flap shows the correct
alternative fuel.
The use of components not designed for
bioethanol engines could cause fire, injury
or engine damage.
Reserve fuel can
The reserve fuel can should be filled with petrol,
see the NOTE box, page 156.
IMPORTANT
Make sure the reserve fuel can is securely
fastened and that its cap is sealed.
WARNING
Ethanol is sensitive to sparks, and explosive
gases could form in the reserve fuel can if it
is refuelled with ethanol.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
148
Diesel
Diesel must meet the EN 590 or JIS K2204
standards.
IMPORTANT
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European
diesel standard.
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels which must not be used:
special additives, Marine Diesel Fuel, fuel
oil, RME
1
(Rape Methyl Ester) and vegetable
oil. These fuels do not fulfil the requirements
in accordance with Volvo recommendations
and generate increased wear and engine
damage that is not covered by the Volvo
warranty.
Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants,
such as excessively high volumes of sulphur
particles for example. Only use diesel fuel from
well-known producers. Never use diesel of
dubious quality.
At low temperatures (-40 °C to -6 °C), a paraffin
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which
may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel
fuel designed for low temperatures around
freezing point is available from the major oil
companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem-
peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre-
cipitate.
IMPORTANT
Use special winter grade fuel during cold
months.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
refuelling, check that the area around the fuel
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-
gent and water.
IMPORTANT
The sulphur content must be a maximum of
50 ppm.
Empty tank
The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine
means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
tank may need to be vented in the workshop in
order to restart the engine after fuelling.
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star-
vation, the fuel system needs a few moments
to carry out a check. Do this before starting the
engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with
diesel:
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and turn to key position II (see
page 154).
2. Wait approx. 1 minute.
3. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/
or clutch pedal, and turn the remote control
key to start position III.
Draining condensation from the fuel filter
The fuel filter separates condensation from the
fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera-
tion.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
or if you suspect that the car has been filled
with contaminated fuel.
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water
separation in the fuel filter.
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Diesel cars may be equipped with a particle fil-
ter, which results in more efficient emission
control. The particles in the exhaust gases are
collected in the filter during normal driving. So-
1
Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
149
called "regeneration" is started in order to burn
away the particles and empty the filter. This
requires the engine to have reached normal
operating temperature.
Regeneration of the filter takes place automat-
ically and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may
take a little longer at a low average speed. Fuel
consumption may increase slightly during
regeneration.
The rear window heating may be activated
automatically to increase the load on the
engine during regeneration without warning.
Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances in
cold weather then the engine does not reach
normal operating temperature. This means that
regeneration of the diesel particle filter does
not take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has become
approximately 80% full of particles, the yellow
information symbol on the instrument panel
illuminates, and the message
SOOT FILTER
FULL SEE OWNER MANUAL
is shown on the
instrument panel display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car
until the engine reaches normal operating tem-
perature, preferably on a main road or motor-
way. The car should then be driven for approx-
imately 20 minutes more.
NOTE
A smaller reduction of engine power may be
noticed temporarily during regeneration.
When regeneration is complete the message is
cleared automatically.
IMPORTANT
If the filter fills up it may be incapable of
functioning. Then it can be difficult to start
the engine and there is a risk that the filter
will have to be replaced.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that
the engine reaches normal operating tempera-
ture more quickly.
06 Starting and driving
Alcolock*
06
150
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on the Alcolock
The function of the Alcolock
1
is to prevent the
car from being driven by individuals under the
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be
started the driver must take a breath test that
verifies that he/she is not under the influence
of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in
accordance with each market's limit value in
force for driving legally.
WARNING
The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt
the driver from responsibility. It is always the
responsibility of the driver to be sober and
to drive the car safely.
Functions
1. Nozzle for breath test.
2. Switch.
3. Transmission button.
4. Lamp for battery status.
5. Lamp for result of breath test.
6. Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
Operation
Battery
Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery sta-
tus:
Indicator lamp
(4)
Battery status
Green flashing Charging in pro-
gress
Green Fully charged
Yellow Semi-charged
Red Discharged - fit the
charger in the holder
or connect the
power supply cable
from the glovebox.
NOTE
Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will
keep the built-in battery fully charged and
the Alcolock is activated automatically
when the car is opened.
1
Also called Alcoguard.
06 Starting and driving
Alcolock*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
151
Before starting the engine
The Alcolock is activated automatically and is
then ready for use when the car is opened.
1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the
Alcolock is ready for use.
2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If
the Alcolock is outside the car when it is
unlocked then it must first be activated
with the switch (2).
3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath
and blow with an even pressure until a
"click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds.
The result will be one of the alternatives in
the following table Result after breath
test.
4. If no message is shown then the transmis-
sion to the car may have failed - in which
case, press the button (3) to transmit the
result to the car manually.
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock
in its holder.
6. Start the engine following an approved
breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it
must be repeated.
Result after breath test
Indicator lamp
(5) + Display text
Specification
Green lamp +
ALCOGUARD
APPROVED TEST
Start the engine - no
alcohol content
measured.
Yellow lamp +
ALCOGUARD
APPROVED TEST
Engine starting pos-
sible - measured
alcohol content is
above 0.1 promille
but below the limit
value in force
A
.
Red lamp + DISAP-
PROVED TEST
WAIT 1 MINUTE
Engine starting not
possible - measured
alcohol content is
above the limit value
in force
A
.
A
Limits vary between countries, so find out what limits apply.
See also the section entitled General information on the
Alcolock on page150.
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
To bear in mind
Before the breath test
In order to obtain correct function and as accu-
rate a measurement result as possible:
Avoid eating or drinking approx.
5 minutes before the breath test.
Avoid excess windscreen washing - the
alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an
incorrect measurement result.
Change of driver
In order to ensure that a new breath test is car-
ried out in the event of a change of driver -
depress the switch (2) and the send button (3)
simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At
which point the car returns to start inhibition
mode and a new approved breath test is
required before starting the engine.
Calibration and service
The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated
at a workshop
2
every 12 months.
30 days before recalibration is necessary the
display shows
ALCOGUARD CALIBR.
REQUIRED
. If calibration is not carried out
within these 30 days then normal engine star-
ting will be blocked - only starting with the
2
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
06 Starting and driving
Alcolock*
06
152
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Bypass function will then be possible, see
page 152 section Emergency situation.
The message can be cleared by pressing the
send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out on
its own after approx. 2 minutes but then reap-
pears each time the engine is started - only
recalibration at a workshop
2
can clear the mes-
sage permanently.
Cold or hot weather
The colder the weather the longer it takes
before the Alcolock is ready for use:
Temperature (ºC) Maximum heat-
ing time (sec-
onds)
+10 to +85 10
-5 to +10 60
-40 to -5 180
At temperatures below -20 ºC or above
+60 ºC the Alcolock requires additional power
supply. The display shows
ALCOGUARD
INSERT POWER CABLE
. In which case, con-
nect the power supply cable from the glovebox
and wait until indicator lamp (6) is green.
In extremely cold weather the heating time can
be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors.
Emergency situation
In the event of an emergency situation or the
Alcolock is out of order, it is possible to bypass
the Alcolock in order to drive the car.
NOTE
All Bypass activation is logged and saved in
memory, see page 10 in the section,
Recording data.
After the Bypass function has been activated
the display shows
ALCOGUARD BYPASS
ENABLED
the whole time while driving and
can only be reset by a workshop
2
.
The Bypass function can be tested without the
error message being logged - in which case,
carry out all the steps without starting the car.
The error message is cleared when the car is
locked.
When the Alcolock is installed, either the
Bypass or Emergency function is selected as
the bypassing option. This setting can be
changed afterwards at a workshop
2
.
Activating the Bypass function
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch READ button and the button for
hazard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the display first shows
BYPASS ACTIVATED WAIT 1 MINUTE
and then ALCOGUARD BYPASS
ENABLED
- after which the engine can be
started.
This function can be activated several times.
The error message shown during driving can
only be cleared at a workshop
2
.
Activating the Emergency function
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch READ button and the button for
hazard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the display shows
ALCOGUARD BYPASS ENABLED and
the engine can be started.
This function can be used once, after which a
reset must be made at a workshop
2
.
2
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
06 Starting and driving
Alcolock*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
153
Symbols and display messages
In addition to the previously described mes-
sages, the combined instrument panel's dis-
play can also show the following:
Display text Meaning/Action
ALCOGUARD
RESTART POSSI-
BLE
The engine has been
switched off for less
than 30 minutes -
engine starting pos-
sible without new
test.
ALCOGUARD
SERVICE
REQUIRED
Contact a work-
shop
2
.
ALCOGUARD NO
SIGNAL
Transmission failed -
send manually with
button (3) or take a
new breath test.
ALCOGUARD
INVALID TEST
Test failed - take a
new breath test.
ALCOGUARD
BLOW LONGER
Blowing too short -
blow for longer.
ALCOGUARD
BLOW SOFTER
Blowing too hard -
blow more gently.
Display text Meaning/Action
ALCOGUARD
BLOW HARDER
Blowing too weak -
blow harder.
ALCOGUARD
WAIT PREHEAT-
ING
Heating not finished
- wait for text
ALCOGUARD
BLOW 5 SEC-
ONDS
.
2
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine
06
154
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Before starting the engine
Apply the parking brake.
Note that if the car is equipped with an alcolock
then a breath test must first be approved
before the engine can be started, see
page 150.
Automatic gearbox
Move the gear selector in position P or N.
Manual gearbox
Put the gear lever in neutral and hold the clutch
pedal fully depressed. This is particularly
important in very cold conditions.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch while driving or when the
car is being towed. The steering lock could
otherwise be activated, making it impossi-
ble to steer the car.
The remote control key must be in key posi-
tion II when the car is being towed.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is in order that the emis-
sions system can reach normal operating
temperature as quickly as possible, which
minimises exhaust emissions and protects
the environment.
Starting the engine
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts -
wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the
battery is allowed to recover.
Petrol
Turn the remote control key to key position
III. If the engine does not start within
5–10 seconds, release the key and try
again.
Diesel
1. Turn the remote control key to key position
II.
> An indicator symbol in the combined
instrument panel shows that engine pre-
heating is underway, see page 53.
2.
Turn the ignition key to position III when
the indicator symbol goes out.
Autostart *
With the autostart function, there is no need to
hold the remote control key (or ignition dial, on
cars with Keyless Drive - see page 130) in key
position III until the engine has started.
Turn the key to key position III and release
it - the starter motor then works automati-
cally until the engine has started.
NOTE
If the diesel engine is started in extreme cold
without waiting for engine preheating, then
the automatic start sequence can be
delayed for a couple of seconds.
Key positions
0 – Locked position
The steering lock is activated
when the remote control key
is removed from the ignition
switch.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine
06
155
I – Radio position
Steering lock deactivated.
Certain functions can be
used. The engine's electrical
system is not activated.
II – Driving position
The remote control key's
position when driving. The
whole electrical system is
engaged.
III – Start position
The starter motor is activated.
The remote control key is
released when the engine has
started and then springs back
to drive position.
A ticking sound can be heard
if the key reaches an intermediate position - in
which case, turn the key to position II and back
to get rid of the sound.
When the steering lock is activated
If the front wheels are positioned so that there
is tension in the steering lock then the infor-
mation display may show a warning message
and the car cannot be started. In which case,
proceed as follows:
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch and turn the steering wheel
so that the tension is released.
2. Hold the steering wheel in this position.
Reinsert the key and make a new attempt
to start the car.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch while driving or when the
car is being towed. The steering lock would
be activated, making it impossible to steer
the car.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch when leaving the car,
especially if there are children in the car.
Remote control keys and electronic
immobiliser
The remote control key must not hang with
other keys or metal objects on the same key
ring. The electronic immobiliser could be acti-
vated accidentally.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine – Flexifuel
06
156
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information about starting
with Flexifuel
The engine is started in the same way as in a
petrol-engined car, see page 154.
NOTE
The immobiliser is activated in the event of
repeated start attempts. Before a new start
attempt is made the key/dial must first be
turned back to position I or 0.
In the event of starting difficulties
If the engine does not start at the first start
attempt, proceed as follows:
1. Depress the accelerator pedal 1/3 to 1/2.
2. Turn the remote control key/ignition dial to
key position III.
3. When the engine has started, ease the
accelerator pedal gradually as the engine
speed increases.
If the engine has not started after
10 seconds, second attempt
Turn the remote control key/ignition dial to
key position III until the engine starts, but
not longer than 60 seconds.
If the engine still does not start
Please wait for one minute, fully depress
the accelerator pedal and repeat the pre-
vious procedure.
IMPORTANT
If the engine does not start despite repeated
start attempts, contact a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Engine block heater*
Electrical input to the engine block heater.
When the temperature is expected to be lower
than –10 °C and the car has been refuelled with
bioethanol E85, an engine block heater should
be used for about 2 hours to facilitate the quick
starting of the engine.
The lower the temperature, the longer the time
required with the engine block heater. At
-20 °C the heater should be used for approx. 3
hours.
Cars intended for E85 have an electric engine
block heater*. Starting and driving with a pre-
heated engine involves significantly lower
emissions and reduced fuel consumption. For
this reason you should aim to use the engine
block heater throughout the winter months.
WARNING
The engine block heater is powered by high
voltage. Fault tracing and repair of an elec-
tric engine block heater and its electrical
connections must only be carried out by a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine – Flexifuel
06
157
NOTE
Points to remember for carrying reserve
fuel:
In the event of stalling due to an empty
fuel tank, bioethanol E85 from a reserve
fuel can may make the engine difficult
to start in extreme cold. This is avoided
by filling the reserve fuel can with 95
octane petrol.
For more information on Flexifuel's bioethanol
E85 fuel, see page 147.
Fuel adaptation
If the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the car
has been driven on bioethanol E85 (or vice
versa) then the engine may run slightly
unevenly for a time. For this reason it is impor-
tant to allow the engine to accustom itself
(adapt) to the new fuel mixture.
Adaptation takes place automatically when the
car is driven for a short period at an even
speed.
IMPORTANT
After the fuel mixture in the tank has been
changed an adaptation should be made by
driving at an even speed for about 15
minutes.
If the battery has been discharged or discon-
nected then a slightly longer period of driving
is required for the adaptation as the memory
for the electronics has been cleared.
06 Starting and driving
Keyless drive*
06
158
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
G019410
The keyless drive system allows the car to be
unlocked, driven and locked without the need
for a key, see page 130.
The ignition switch ignition dial is used in the
same way as the remote control key. One pre-
condition for starting the car is that the car's
remote control key is located inside the pas-
senger compartment or the cargo area.
Starting the car
Depress the clutch pedal (cars with manual
gearbox) or brake pedal (cars with auto-
matic gearbox).
Petrol engine
Press in and turn the ignition dial to key
position III.
Diesel engine
1.
First turn the ignition dial to key position II
and wait until the diesel indicator symbol in
the combined instrument panel goes out,
see page 53.
2. Following which, turn the ignition dial to
position III.
Starting with the remote control key
G019420
If the remote control key's battery is dis-
charged then the Keyless Drive function does
not work. In which case, start the car by using
the remote control key as ignition dial.
1. Press in the catch in the ignition dial.
2. Pull the ignition dial out from the ignition
switch.
3. Insert the remote control key into the igni-
tion switch and start in the same way as
with the ignition dial.
06 Starting and driving
Manual gearbox
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
159
Gear positions
Gearshift pattern 5-speed gearbox.
Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox.
The 6-speed box is available in two versions -
reverse gear position differs between them.
Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted
on the gear lever.
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between
gear changes.
WARNING
Get into the habit of always applying the
parking brake when parking on a slope - an
engaged gear is not sufficient to hold the car
in all situations.
Gear shift indicator - GSI*
GSI - Gear Shift Indicator -
advises the driver of the opti-
mum time to change gear.
The indication is given with an
arrow for up and down shift-
ing respectively in the lower
information display of the
combined instrument panel, see page 51.
Reverse gear inhibitor
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-
ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse
gear during normal forward travel.
Start from neutral position N and only
engage reverse gear R when the car is sta-
tionary.
NOTE
With the upper variant of the shifting pattern
for 6-speed gearbox (see previous illustra-
tion) - first press down the gear lever in the
N position in order to engage reverse gear.
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
160
Geartronic automatic gear positions
G018264
D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/): Manual gear
positions.
The information display shows the position of
the gear selector using the following indica-
tions:
P, R, N, D, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, see
page 51.
P – Parking position
Select position P when you wish to start the
engine or park the car.
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when position
P is selected.
NOTE
The brake pedal must be depressed in order
to be able to disengage the gear lever from
the P position.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when
the P position is engaged. Always apply the
parking brake when parking the car.
WARNING
Get into the habit of always applying the
parking brake when parking on a slope - the
automatic transmission's P position is not
sufficient to hold the car in all situations.
R – Reverse
The car must be stationary when position R is
selected.
N – Neutral
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake when the car
is stationary with the gear selector in posi-
tion N.
NOTE
The brake pedal must be depressed in order
to be able to disengage the gear lever from
the N position if the car has been stationary
for more than 3 seconds.
D – Drive
D is the normal driving position. The car auto-
matically shifts up and down depending on the
level of acceleration and speed. The car must
be stationary when the gear selector is moved
to position D from position R.
Geartronic manual gear positions (+/-)
The driver can also change gear manually
using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The
car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal
is released.
Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving
the lever to the side from position D to the end
position at +/. The information display shifts
the indication from
D to one of the figures 1
6, which is equivalent to the gear that is
engaged just then, see page 51.
Move the lever forwards towards + (plus)
to change up a gear and release it, the lever
returns to its rest position between + and
.
or
Pull the lever back towards (minus) to
change down a gear and release it.
The manual gearshift mode (+/) can be
selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the
driver allows the speed to decrease lower than
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
``
161
a level suitable for the selected gear, in order
to avoid jerking and stalling.
To return to automatic driving mode:
Move the lever to the side to the end posi-
tion at D.
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kick-
down.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-
down position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-
tion is needed, such as for overtaking.
Safety function
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox
control program has a protective downshift
inhibitor which prevents the kick-down func-
tion.
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick-
down which would result in an engine speed
high enough to damage the engine. Nothing
happens if the driver still tries to shift down in
this way at high engine speed – the original
gear remains engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can
change one or more gears at a time depending
on engine speed. The car changes up when the
engine reaches its maximum speed in order to
prevent damage to the engine.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
G020237
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions
are locked with a latch that is released with the
inhibitor button on the gear selector.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever
can be moved forwards or backwards between
P, R, N and D.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
Cars with an automatic gearbox have special
safety systems:
Keylock
To remove the remote control key, the gear
selector must be in the P position. The key is
locked in all other positions.
Parking position (P)
Stationary car with engine running:
Hold your foot on the brake pedal when
moving the gear selector to another posi-
tion.
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Parking
position (P position)
To be able to move the gear selector from the
P position to other gear positions, the remote
control key must be in position II and the brake
pedal must be depressed.
Shiftlock – Neutral (N position)
If the gear selector is in the N position and the
car has been stationary for at least three sec-
onds (irrespective of whether the engine is run-
ning) then the gear selector is locked in the N
position.
To be able to move the gear selector from the
N position to another gear position, the brake
pedal must be depressed and the remote con-
trol key must be in position II.
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
162
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor
G018263
In certain cases, it may be necessary to move
the car when it is not driveable, for example if
the battery is flat. Proceed as follows to move
the car:
1.
There is a small cover behind P-R-N-D on
the gear selector panel. Open it at the rear
edge.
2. Fully insert the key blade from the remote
control key.
3. Hold the key blade down and at the same
time move the gear lever out of the P posi-
tion.
Cold start
When starting in low temperatures, the gear
changes can sometimes feel hard. This is due
to the gearbox oil's viscosity at low tempera-
tures. To reduce engine emissions, the gear-
box shifts up later than normal when the engine
is started at low temperatures.
NOTE
Depending on the engine temperature when
the engine is started, the idle speed after a
cold start may be higher than normal for
certain engine types.
Automatic gearbox Powershift*
G018264
D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/): Manual gear
positions.
Powershift is a six-stage automatic gearbox
that has double mechanical clutch discs in
contrast to a conventional automatic gearbox.
A conventional automatic gearbox has a
hydraulic torque converter instead that trans-
fers power from engine to gearbox.
Powershift transmission operates in the same
way and has similar controls and functions as
the Geartronic automatic transmission, descri-
bed in the previous section.
In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not
the car is equipped with Powershift transmis-
sion, this can be verified by checking the des-
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
163
ignation on the decal number (5) under the
bonnet - see page 286. The designa-
tion ”MPS6” means that it is Powershift trans-
mission - otherwise it is Geartronic automatic
transmission.
To bear in mind
The transmission's double clutch has overload
protection that is activated if it becomes too
hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with the
accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a
long time.
Overheated transmission causes the car to
shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illu-
minates and the information display shows a
message. The transmission can also overheat
during slow driving in queues (10 km/h or
slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailer
hitched. The transmission cools down when
the car is stationary, with foot brake depressed
and the engine running at idling speed.
Overheating during slow driving in queues can
be avoided by driving in stages: Stop the car
and wait with your foot on the brake pedal until
there is a moderate distance to the traffic
ahead, drive forward a short distance, and then
wait another moment with your foot on the
brake pedal.
IMPORTANT
Use the foot brake to hold the car stationary
on an uphill gradient - do not hold the car
with the accelerator pedal. The gearbox
could then overheat.
For important information regarding Powershift
transmission and towing - see page 178.
Text message and action
In some situations the display can show a mes-
sage at the same time as a symbol is illumi-
nated.
The table shows three steps with an increased
degree of seriousness should the gearbox
become too hot. In parallel with the display text
the driver is also advised that the car's elec-
tronics are temporarily changing the driving
characteristics. Follow the instructions on the
information display where appropriate.
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
164
Symbol Display Driving characteristics Action
TRANSM. OVERHEAT BRAKE TO
HOLD
Difficulty in maintaining even speed at con-
stant engine speed.
Gearbox overheated. Keep the car station-
ary using the foot brake
A
.
TRANSM. OVERHEAT PARK SAFELY
Significant pulling in the car's traction. Gearbox overheated. Park the car immedi-
ately in a safe manner.
TRANSM. COOLING LET ENGINE RUN
No drive due to overheated gearbox. Gearbox overheated. For fastest cooling:
Run the engine at idling speed with the gear
lever in the N or P position until the mes-
sage clears.
A
For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.
NOTE
The table's examples are no indication that
the car is defective but instead show that a
safety function has been activated inten-
tionally to prevent damage to one of the
car's components.
WARNING
If a warning symbol combined with the text
TRANSM. OVERHEAT PARK SAFELY is
ignored then the heat in the gearbox may
become so high that the power transmis-
sion between engine and gearbox is tem-
porarily halted in order to prevent the clutch
from malfunctioning - the car then loses
drive and is stationary until gearbox tem-
perature has cooled to an acceptable level.
For more possible display messages with their
respective proposals for solutions concerning
automatic transmission, see page 56.
A display text clears automatically after the
action has been carried out or after one press
on the indicator stalk READ button.
06 Starting and driving
DRIVe Start-Stop*
06
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
165
General
Quieter and cleaner
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-
ration's core values and it influences all of our
operations. This target-orientation has resulted
in the DRIVe vehicle series whose concept
consists of an interaction between several sep-
arate energy-saving functions, all with the
common purpose of reducing fuel consump-
tion, which in turn contributes to reduced
exhaust emissions.
Start/Stop
In addition to being equipped with a reliable
and fuel-efficient diesel engine, this car's
engine is equipped with a Start and Stop func-
tion which comes into action in the event of e.g.
stationary traffic queues or waiting at traffic
lights - see the detailed description on the next
page.
The engine's automatic restart sequence runs
so smoothly that it is hardly noticeable that the
engine has actually been switched off. The
experience is that the engine has been running
the whole time but with an extremely quiet and
low idling speed.
The Start/Stop function gives the driver the
opportunity for a more active environmentally
conscious driving style by means of being able
to disengage gear and letting the engine auto-
stop, whenever appropriate.
Smart charging
The car's kinetic energy is used during engine
braking by means of it being converted into
electricity and stored in the car's battery.
Adapted power steering
Another DRIVe function is that the power steer-
ing's energy take-off is adapted according to
requirements. By means of optimisation and
the introduction of an energy saving function
the energy take-off can be minimised on occa-
sions where power assistance (help in turning
the steering wheel) is not necessary.
Aerodynamics
The DRIVe concept also includes a lowered
chassis, front and rear spoilers with low wind
resistance, as well as specially developed
wheel rims
1
.
1
The range varies depending on the market.
06 Starting and driving
DRIVe Start-Stop*
06
166
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function and operation
On/Off button and display text AUTO START-
STOP ON
.
The Start/Stop system is activated automati-
cally when the engine is started with the key.
The driver is made aware of this function by
means of the On/Off button's green lamp being
illuminated.
NOTE
After starting with the key and each auto-
stop the car must first reach 5 km/h before
the automatic Start/Stop function is re-acti-
vated - following which certain conditions
must also be fulfilled, refer to these under
the heading "The engine does not auto-
stop".
All of the car's normal systems such as lighting,
radio, etc. work as normal even with an auto-
stopped engine, except that some equipment
may have its function temporarily reduced, e.g.
the climate control system's fan speed or
extremely high volume on the audio system.
Auto-stopping the engine
In order for the engine to stop automatically the
car must be stationary - however, the
Start/Stop function does accept slow rolling,
the equivalent to normal walking pace:
Set the gear lever in neutral position and
release the clutch pedal - the engine stops
automatically.
The display text
ENGINE IN
AUTO START
, and the but-
ton's illuminated green lamp,
reminds - and indicates - that
the engine has been auto-
stopped.
Auto-starting the engine
With the gear lever in neutral position:
Depress the clutch pedal - the engine
starts automatically.
or
Depress the accelerator pedal - the engine
starts automatically.
On a downhill gradient there is also the option
to start the engine automatically as follows:
Release the foot brake and allow the car to
move off - the engine starts automatically
when the speed exceeds normal walking
pace.
After starting the engine:
Engage a suitable gear and continue the
journey.
Gear indicator
An essential detail in connection with environ-
mental driving is to drive in the right gear and
to change gear in time.
The driver is assisted by an
indicator which notifies the
driver when it is most advan-
tageous to engage the next
higher or lower gear - GSI
(Gear Shift Indicator).
06 Starting and driving
DRIVe Start-Stop*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
167
Indication is made with an up or down arrow in
the combined instrument panel's lower dis-
play.
Deactivating the Start/Stop function
The information display shows here that the Start/
Stop function has been disengaged.
In certain situations, it may
advisable to temporarily
switch off the automatic
Start/Stop function - this is
carried out by pressing this
button once, at which point
the button's lamp goes out.
Disengaged Start/Stop function is indicated by
a message appearing on the information dis-
play for about 5 seconds.
The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it is
reactivated with the button or until the next
time the engine is started with the key.
Limitations
The engine does not auto-stop
Even if the Start/Stop function is activated, the
engine does not auto-stop if:
the driver has opened the seatbelt's
buckle.
the car has not stopped completely.
the car has been reversed and reverse gear
is disengaged.
the engine does not have normal operating
temperature.
outside temperature is below freezing
point or above approx. 30 °C.
the environment in the passenger com-
partment differs from the preset values -
indicated by the ventilation fan running at
a high speed.
the capacity of the battery is below the
minimum permissible level.
battery temperature is below freezing point
or above approx. 55 °C.
The engine auto-starts without driver
intervention
An auto-stopped engine may restart in some
cases without the driver having decided that
the journey should continue. In the following
cases the engine auto-starts even if the driver
has not depressed the clutch pedal in order to
engage a gear:
The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened.
Misting forms on the windows.
The outside temperature is below freezing
point or above approx. 30 °C.
There is a temporarily high current take-off
or battery capacity has dropped below the
lowest permissible level.
The car starts to roll - faster than the equiv-
alent normal walking pace.
Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.
WARNING
Do not open the bonnet when the engine
has stopped automatically - the engine may
suddenly start automatically. In order to
avoid starting automatically with raised
bonnet:
Engage a gear and apply the parking
brake.
The engine does not auto-start
In the following cases the engine does not
auto-start after having auto-stopped:
The driver's seatbelt buckle has been
opened - a display text prompts the driver
to start the engine normally.
A gear is engaged without declutching - a
display text prompts the driver to set the
06 Starting and driving
DRIVe Start-Stop*
06
168
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
gear lever in neutral position in order to
enable auto-start.
Involuntary engine stop
In the event that a start-up fails and the engine
stops, proceed as follows:
1. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine
starts automatically after the gear lever has
been set in neutral position. Prior to this the
information display showed the text
PUT
GEAR IN NEUTRAL TO START
.
Text message
In combination with this indicator
lamp the Start/Stop function may
display text messages on the infor-
mation display for certain situa-
tions. A recommended action
should be performed for some of them. The
following table shows some examples.
Message
AUTO START-
STOP ON
Illuminates for
about 5 seconds
after Start/Stop has
been activated.
AUTO START-
STOP OFF
Illuminates for
about 5 seconds
after Start/Stop has
been switched off.
Message
TURN KEY TO
START
The engine will not
auto-start
A
- per-
form a normal start
using the key.
PUT GEAR IN
NEUTRAL TO
START
Set the gear lever in
neutral position
B
.
DEPRESS
CLUTCH PEDAL
TO START
The engine is ready
to auto-start - wait-
ing for declutching.
AUTO START-
STOP SERVICE
REQUIRED
Start/Stop function
disengaged. A work-
shop should be con-
tacted.
A
Occurs if the seatbelt is unbuckled after the engine has auto-
stopped, for example.
B
Occurs if a gear is engaged without declutching after the
engine has auto-stopped.
If a message does not go out after performing
an action a workshop should be contacted - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended,
which also applies in the event of the need for
any other form of technical assistance.
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
06
169
Brake servo
If the car is rolling or is being towed with the
engine turned off, the brake pedal must be
depressed about 5 times harder than when the
engine is running. If the brake pedal is
depressed when the engine is started, you will
feel the pedal drop. This is normal and due to
the brake servo becoming active. This may be
more noticeable if the car has Emergency
Brake Assistance (EBA).
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine
is running.
NOTE
If braking with the engine switched off,
press the brake pedal sharply once, not
repeatedly.
Brake circuits
This symbol illuminates if a brake
circuit is not working.
If a fault should occur in one of the
circuits, it is still possible to brake
the car. The brake pedal will travel further and
may feel softer than normal. Harder pressure
on the pedal is needed to produce the normal
braking effect.
Dampness can affect braking
characteristics
Brake components become wet when the car
is driven in heavy rain, through pools of water
or when the car is washed. This may alter brake
pad friction characteristics so that there is a
delay before braking effect is noticed.
Press the brake pedal lightly from time to time
if driving for long stretches in rain or slushy
snow, as well as after setting off in very damp
or cold weather. This warms up the brake pads
and dries off any water. This precaution is also
recommended before parking the car for a long
period in such weather conditions.
If the brakes are used heavily
When driving in the Alps or other roads with
similar characteristics, the car's brakes are
heavily loaded even if the brake pedal is not
being depressed especially hard.
Because speed is often low, the brakes are not
cooled as effectively as when driving on flat
roads at higher speed.
So as not to overload the brakes, shift down
when driving downhill instead of using the foot
brake. Use the same gear driving downhill as
you would use driving uphill. This uses engine
braking more efficiently so the foot brake is
only required for brief periods.
Bear in mind that driving with a trailer puts an
additional load on the car's brakes.
Anti-lock braking system - ABS
The anti-lock braking system
(ABS) prevents the wheels from
locking up during braking.
This means the ability to steer is
maintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid a
hazard for example.
After the engine has been started, the ABS will
perform a brief self-test at a speed of
about 20 km/h. This can be felt and heard as
pulses in the brake pedal.
To get the most out of the ABS:
1. Depress the brake pedal with full force.
Pulses will be felt.
2. Steer the car in the direction of travel. Do
not release the pressure on the pedal.
Practice braking with the ABS system in a traf-
fic-free area and in different weather condi-
tions.
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
06
170
Emergency Brake Assistance – EBA
For sudden braking, EBA (Emergency Brake
Assist) provides full-strength braking instanta-
neously. The EBA function senses when heavy
braking is underway by registering how quickly
the brake pedal is depressed.
Continue braking without easing off on the
brake pedal. The function disengages when
the pressure on the brake pedal eases.
This function is always active. It cannot be dis-
engaged.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS warning symbols illu-
minate at the same time, there may be a
fault in the brake system. If the level in the
brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage,
drive carefully to the nearest workshop and
have the brake system checked - an author-
ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
be investigated.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal low-
ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the
brake pedal is released then all braking
ceases.
Emergency brake lights and automatic
hazard warning flashers
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about sudden braking. The
function means that the brake light flashes
instead of - as in normal braking - shining with
a constant glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated at
speeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system is
working and/or in the event of sudden braking.
After the car's speed has been slowed below
10 km/h the brake light returns from flashing to
the normal constant glow - while at the same
time the hazard warning flashers are activated,
and they flash until the driver changes engine
speed with the accelerator pedal or they are
deactivated with their button, see page 73.
06 Starting and driving
DSTC – Stability and traction control system*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
171
General
The stability and traction control system, DSTC
(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control) helps
the driver to avoid skidding and improves the
car's traction.
A pulsing sound may be noticed during braking
or acceleration when the system is in action.
The car may accelerate slower than expected
when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
Active Yaw Control
The function limits the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise
the car.
Spin Control
The function prevents the driving wheels from
spinning against the road surface during accel-
eration.
Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and trans-
fers power from the driving wheel that is spin-
ning to the one that is not.
Reduced operation
G029057
Controls and information display.
Thumbwheel
1
RESET button
1
The stability system is activated automatically
each time the car is started.
System operation during skidding and accel-
eration can be partially deactivated. Operation
during skidding is then delayed and so allows
more skidding which provides greater freedom
for dynamic driving. Traction in deep snow or
sand is improved at the same time as acceler-
ation is no longer limited.
Operation
1. Turn the thumbwheel until the DSTC menu
appears.
DSTC ON means that the system function
is unchanged.
DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF means that
system operation is reduced.
2.
Press and hold the RESET button until the
DSTC menu is changed.
The system remains reduced until the
driver reactivates it or until the engine is
switched off - after the engine is started the
next time DSTC is back in its normal mode
again.
WARNING
Suppressing system function may alter the
driving characteristics of the car.
NOTE
DSTC ON is shown for several seconds on
the display each time the engine is started.
1
No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.
06 Starting and driving
DSTC – Stability and traction control system*
06
172
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Messages on the information display
TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY
OFF
means that the system has been tempo-
rarily reduced due to excessive brake tempera-
ture.
The function is reactivated automatically
when the brakes have cooled.
ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED system
disabled due to a fault.
Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
> If the message remains when the engine
is restarted, drive to a workshop. An
authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Symbols in the combined instrument
panel
DSTC system
Information
If the symbols and are displayed at the
same time:
Read the message on the information dis-
play.
If the symbol
appears alone then it may
appear as follows:
Flashing light means that the DSTC system
is now being activated.
Constant glow for 2 seconds means sys-
tem check when the engine is started.
Constant glow after starting the engine or
while driving means that there is a fault in
the DSTC system.
06 Starting and driving
Park Assist*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
173
General information on parking
assistance
Parking assistance front and rear.
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
A signal indicates the distance to a detected
obstacle.
WARNING
Parking assistance does not relinquish the
driver's own responsibility during parking.
The sensors have blind spots where obsta-
cles cannot be detected. Be aware of chil-
dren or animals near the car.
Variants
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
Rear only.
Both front and rear.
Function
The frequency of the signal increases the
shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of
or behind the car. If the volume of another
audio source from the audio system is high,
then this is automatically lowered.
The tone becomes constant at a distance of
about 30 cm. If there are obstacles within this
distance both behind and in front of the car, the
signal alternates between left and right-hand
speakers.
Rear parking assistance only
The system is automatically engaged when the
car is started.
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged and the message
Park
Assist
active EXIT to deactivate is shown on
the audio system's display.
If the system is switched off, the display shows
Park Assist deactivated ENTER to
activate
as soon as reverse gear is engaged.
To change the settings, see page 84.
The distance covered behind the car is
about 1.5 metres. The signal comes from the
rear loudspeakers.
Limitations
The system must be deactivated when revers-
ing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbar
or similar. Otherwise the trailer or bike carrier
would trigger the sensors.
NOTE
Rear parking assistance is deactivated
automatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo
genuine trailer cable is used.
Parking assistance both front and rear
Button for Off/On (button location depends on
other selected equipment).
06 Starting and driving
Park Assist*
06
174
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The system is automatically engaged when the
car is started and the switch's On/Off lamp is
illuminated. If parking assistance is switched
off with the button, the lamp goes out.
Front
Front parking assistance is active at speeds
below 15 km/h. The system is deactivated at
higher speeds. When the speed is below
10 km/h the system is reactivated.
The distance covered to the front of the car is
about 0.8 metres. The signal for obstacles in
front comes from the front loudspeakers.
Limitations
Front parking assistance cannot be combined
with extra lights because the sensors are affec-
ted by the extra lights.
Rear
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged.
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 metres. The signal for obstacles
behind comes from the rear loudspeakers.
Limitations
See the previous section Rear parking assis-
tance only.
Fault indicator
If the information symbol illumi-
nates with constant glow and the
display shows
PARK ASSIST
SERVICE REQUIRED
then park-
ing assistance is disengaged. For
attention, contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance
system may produce incorrect warning sig-
nals that are caused by external sound
sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre-
quencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Cleaning the sensors
Parking assistance sensors.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals.
06 Starting and driving
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
175
General
G020295
Rearview mirror with BLIS system.
BLIS camera
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
WARNING
The system is a supplement to, not a
replacement for, a safe driving style and use
of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace
the driver's attention and responsibility. The
responsibility for changing lanes safely
always rests with the driver.
BLIS is an information system that under cer-
tain conditions can help to draw the driver's
attention to vehicles moving in the same direc-
tion in the so-called "blind spot".
The system is designed to work most effec-
tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane
highways.
BLIS is based on camera technology. The cam-
eras (1) are located under the door mirrors.
When a camera has detected a vehicle inside
the blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2) illu-
minates with a constant glow.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle.
If the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault
arises in the system. If for example the sys-
tem's cameras are obscured then the BLIS
indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown
in the information display. In such cases, check
and clean the lenses. If necessary, the system
can be switched off temporarily by pressing the
BLIS button see page 176.
Blind spots
A = approx. 3.0 m, B = approx. 9.5 m.
When BLIS operates
The system operates when the car is driven at
a speed above 10 km/h.
Overtaking
The system is designed to react if you overtake
another vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km/h
faster than the other vehicle.
The system is designed to react if you are over-
taken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km/h
faster than your vehicle.
06 Starting and driving
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
06
176
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is revers-
ing.
A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal
other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre-
vent the vehicle in the screened area from
being detected by BLIS.
Daylight and darkness
In daylight the system reacts to the shape of
the surrounding vehicles. The system is
designed to detect motor vehicles such as
cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.
In darkness the system reacts to the head-
lamps of surrounding vehicles. Vehicles with
headlamps that are switched off are not
detected by the system. This means for exam-
ple that the system does not react to a trailer
without headlamps which is towed behind a
car or truck.
WARNING
The system does not react to cyclists or
moped riders.
The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to
those of the human eye, i.e. they do not see
as well in e.g. heavy snowfall, strong
oncoming light or thick fog.
Activate/deactivate
Button for Off/On (button location depends on
other selected equipment).
BLIS is activated when the engine is started.
The indicator lamps in the door panels flash
three times when BLIS is activated.
The system can be deactivated/activated by
pressing the BLIS button.
When BLIS is deactivated the light in the button
goes out and a text message is shown on the
instrument panel display.
When BLIS is activated the light in the button
illuminates, a new text message is shown on
the display and the indicator lamps in the door
panels flash three times. Press the READ but-
ton to clear the text message. For more infor-
mation on messages, see page 56.
BLIS system message
Text on the dis-
play
Specification
BLIS ON
The BLIS system is
activated.
BLIS REDUCED
FUNCTION
Reduced function in
data transmission
between the BLIS
system's camera
and the car's electri-
cal system.
The camera resets
itself when the data
transmission
between the BLIS
system's camera
and the car's electri-
cal system returns to
normal.
BLIS CAMERA
BLOCKED
One or both cam-
eras blocked - clean
the lenses.
06 Starting and driving
BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
177
Text on the dis-
play
Specification
BLIS SERVICE
REQUIRED
Blind spot syst. dis-
engaged - contact a
workshop.
BLIS OFF
The BLIS system is
deactivated.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS system components
must only be performed by a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Cleaning
In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam-
era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be
cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.
Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not
scratched.
IMPORTANT
The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice
or snow. If necessary, brush snow away
from the lenses.
Limitations
In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may
illuminate despite there being no other vehicle
within the blind spot.
NOTE
If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso-
lated occasions despite there being no
other vehicle within the blind spot then this
does not mean that a fault has arisen in the
system.
In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the
display shows the text
BLIS SERVICE
REQUIRED
.
Here are several examples of situations where
the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if
there is no other vehicle within the blind spot.
Reflection from shiny wet road surface.
G018177
Own shadow on large, light, smooth surface, e.g.
noise barrier or concrete road surface.
Low sun in the camera.
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
06
178
Start assistance
Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged
and the engine does not start. Do not tow the
car to bump start the engine, see page 181.
IMPORTANT
Bump starting the car can damage the cat-
alytic converter.
Towing
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for
towing before towing begins.
1.
Turn the remote control key to position II
and unlock the steering lock so that the car
can be steered, see page 155.
2. The key must remain in the ignition switch
while the car is being towed.
3. Keep the towline taut when the towing
vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot
gently pressed on the brake pedal -
thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.
4. Be prepared to brake to stop.
WARNING
The steering lock must be unlocked
before towing - the lock stays in the
position it was in when the voltage was
disconnected.
The remote control key must be in key
position II - in position I all airbags are
deactivated.
Never remove the key from the ignition
switch when the car is being towed.
NOTE
If the car is de-energised then the steering
lock must be unlocked using a donor bat-
tery before towing can be started.
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not
work when the engine is switched off. The
brake pedal must be pressed about five
times harder than normal, and the steering
will be considerably heavier than normal.
Manual gearbox
Prior to towing:
Move gear lever into neutral and release
the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Geartronic
Prior to towing:
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with
the wheels rolling forward.
Cars with automatic gearbox must not
be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or
further than 80 km.
Automatic gearbox Powershift
The model with Powershift transmission
should not be towed as it is dependent on the
engine running in order to receive sufficient
lubrication. If towing still has to take place, the
route must be as short as possible and then
with very low speed.
In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not
the car is equipped with Powershift transmis-
sion, this can be verified by checking the des-
ignation on the decal number (5) under the
bonnet - see page 286. The designation
"MPS6" means that it is Powershift transmis-
sion - otherwise it is Geartronic transmission.
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
06
179
IMPORTANT
Avoid towing.
However, the car can be towed for a
short distance at low speed to move it
from a dangerous position - not further
than 10 km and not faster than
10 km/h. Note that the car must always
be towed with the wheels rolling for-
ward.
In the event of moving a longer distance
than 10 km, the car must be transported
with the drive wheels raised from the
road - professional recovery is recom-
mended.
Prior to towing:
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
Towing eye
The towing eye is screwed into a threaded
socket behind a cover on the right-hand side
of the bumper, front or rear.
Fitting the towing eye
Take out the towing eye (1) that is located
under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
The cover for the towing eye's attachment
point is available in two variants which
must be opened in different ways:
Open the variant with a recess using a
coin or similar inserted in the recess,
turning it outwards. Then turn out the
cover completely and remove it.
The second variant has a marking along
one side or in a corner: Press the mark-
ing with a finger and fold out the oppo-
site side/corner at the same time using
a coin or similar - the cover turns around
its axis and can then be removed.
Screw the towing eye right in up to its
flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g.
using the wheel wrench.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and
return it to its place.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the
bumper.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing
on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or
out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for
recovery assistance.
NOTE
On certain cars with fitted towbar the towing
eye cannot be secured in the rear mounting.
In which case, secure the tow rope in the
towbar.
For this reason it is advisable to store the
towbar's towball in the car, see page 184.
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
06
180
Recovery
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
The car must always be towed with the wheels
rolling forward.
IMPORTANT
Cars with automatic gearbox must only be
towed with drive wheels raised from the
road.
06 Starting and driving
Start assistance
06
181
Starting with a donor battery
If the battery is flat then the car can be started
with current from another battery.
When jump starting the car, the following steps
are recommended to avoid short circuits or
other damage:
1. Turn the remote control key to key position
0.
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage
of 12 V.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another
car - switch off the donor car's engine and
make sure that the two cars do not touch
each other.
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
5. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive terminal (2).
6. Connect one of the black jump lead's
clamps to the donor battery's negative ter-
minal (3).
7. Fit the other clamp to a grounding point,
such as by the left-hand spring strut (4).
8. Check that the jump lead clamps are
affixed securely so that there are no sparks
during the starting procedure.
9. Start the engine of the "donor car" and
allow it to run a few minutes at a speed
slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
10. Start the engine in the car with the dis-
charged battery.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the crocodile clips during the
start procedure. There is a risk of sparks
forming.
11. Remove the jump leads in reverse order -
first the black and then the red.
> Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact with
the battery's positive terminal or the
clamp connected to the red jump lead.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is con-
nected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
For more information on the car's battery - see
page 230.
06 Starting and driving
Driving with a trailer
06
182
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's
payload by a corresponding weight. For more
detailed information on weights, see
page 289.
If the towing bracket is fitted by an authorised
Volvo workshop, then the car is delivered with
the necessary equipment for driving with a
trailer.
The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type.
If the towbar is retrofitted, check with a
Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped
for driving with a trailer.
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
weight on the towing bracket follows the
specified maximum towball load.
Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-
mended pressure for a full load. For tyre
pressure decal location, see page 198.
Clean the towing bracket regularly and
grease the towball
1
.
The engine is loaded more heavily than
usual when driving with a trailer.
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Please wait until it has been
driven at least 1000 km.
The brakes are loaded much more than
usual on long and steep downhill slopes.
Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your
speed.
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 12%.
For safety reasons, the maximum permit-
ted speed for the car when coupled with a
trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the
regulations in force for the permitted
speeds and weights.
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
Trailer weights
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer
weights, see page 289.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer
weights are those permitted by Volvo.
National vehicle regulations can further limit
trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be
certified for higher towing weights than the
car can actually tow.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer
may be difficult to control in the event of
sudden movement and braking.
Manual gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
climate there may be a risk of overheating.
Do not run the engine at higher revolutions
than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm)
- otherwise the oil temperature may
become too high.
Diesel engine 5-cyl
If an engine starts to run too hot, the instru-
ment panel will display a text message
which recommends switching to a lower
gear - follow the recommendation given.
In the event of a risk of overheating the
optimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000
rpm for optimum circulation of the coolant.
1
Do not lubricate the towball if using a stabiliser hitch.
06 Starting and driving
Driving with a trailer
06
183
Automatic gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
climate there may be a risk of overheating.
An automatic gearbox selects the optimum
gear related to load and engine speed.
Steep inclines
Do not lock the automatic transmission in
a higher gear than the engine "can cope
with" - it is not always a good idea to drive
at a high gear with low engine revolutions.
IMPORTANT
See also the specific information on slow
driving with trailer for cars with the
Powershift automatic transmission on page
163.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Move the gear selector to parking position
P.
4. Release the foot brake.
Move the gear selector to park position P
when parking an automatic car with a
hitched trailer. Always use the parking
brake.
Block the wheels with chocks when park-
ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Move the gear selector to driving posi-
tion D.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.
06 Starting and driving
Towing equipment*
06
184
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Towbar
If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,
the installation instructions for the loose sec-
tion must be followed carefully, see
page 186.
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
towbar:
Follow the installation instructions care-
fully.
The detachable section must be locked
with the key before setting off.
Check that the indicator window shows
green.
Important checks
The towbar's towball must be cleaned and
greased regularly.
NOTE
If a towball hitch with vibration damper is
used, it is not necessary to grease the tow-
ball.
Storing the towbar
G031118
Towbar storage space.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towbar after use and
store it in the appointed location in the car,
firmly fastened with its strap.
Trailer cable
G014589
An adapter is required if the car's towing
bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has
7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved
by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag
on the ground.
06 Starting and driving
Towing equipment*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
185
Specifications
G010393
G010387
G010388
Dimensions for mounting points (mm)
A B C D E F G H I J K
Fixed towbar standard 1115 81
964 482 40 141 542 150
113
100 140
Fixed towbar with Nivomat 1111 76
Detachable towbar standard 1115 81
63
Detachable towbar with Nivomat 1111 77
1 Side member
2 Ball centre
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
186
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fitting the towbar
G017317
1. Remove the protective cover by first press-
ing in the catch
and then pulling the
cover straight back
.
G020301
2. Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key clock-
wise.
G020302
3. Check that the indicator window (3) shows
red. If the window does not show red,
press in
and turn the locking wheel anti-
clockwise
until you hear a click.
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
187
G020304
4. Insert the towbar until you hear a click.
G020306
5. Check that the indicator window shows
green.
G020307
6. Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi-
tion. Remove the key from the lock.
G020309
7. Check that the towbar is secure by pulling
it up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it
must be detached and reattached in
accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,
the remainder of the towbar should be clean
and dry.
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
188
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G020310
8. Safety cable.
WARNING
Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to
the correct place.
Removing the towbar
G020301
1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
G020312
2.
Push in the locking wheel
and turn it
anticlockwise
until you hear a click.
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
189
G020314
3. Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position
while pulling the towbar rearward and
upward.
WARNING
Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the
car, see page 184.
G017318
4. Push on the protective cover.
06 Starting and driving
Loading
06
190
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a
corresponding weight. For more detailed infor-
mation on weights, see page 289.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
Loading the cargo area
Stop the engine and apply the parking brake
when loading or unloading long objects. The
gear lever or gear selector can be knocked out
of position by long loads, which could set the
car in motion.
To increase the size of the cargo area, the head
restraints can be removed and the seats folded
down, see page 118.
Place the load firmly against the backrest in
front.
The head rests can be removed so that
they are not damaged.
Put wide loads in the centre.
Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on a
lowered backrest.
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery or the glass
surface of the tailgate.
Secure all loads to the load retaining eye-
lets with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry
the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.
WARNING
Never load cargo above the backrest.
The protection provided by the inflatable
curtain in the headlining may be compro-
mised or eliminated by high loads.
Always secure the load. During heavy brak-
ing the load may otherwise shift, causing
injury to the car's occupants.
Load carriers*
To avoid damaging the car and for maximum
possible safety while driving, it is recom-
mended to use load carriers specially designed
for your car by Volvo.
Carefully follow the mounting instructions sup-
plied with the carriers.
Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the
load securely with retaining straps.
Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
The size of the area exposed to the wind,
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
with the load's size.
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
heavy braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving cha-
racteristics are altered by roof loads.
06 Starting and driving
Adjusting headlamp pattern
06
191
Correct light pattern for left or right-
hand traffic
G020317
Headlamp pattern for left-hand traffic.
Headlamp pattern for right-hand traffic.
The headlamp pattern can be adjusted using a
control in each headlamp housing to avoid
dazzling oncoming motorists.
The correct pattern will also better illuminate
the verge.
Halogen headlamps
G021421
Left-hand traffic.
Right-hand traffic.
Headlamps with Active Bending Lights
G021422
Left-hand traffic.
Right-hand traffic.
WARNING
On cars with Xenon headlamps, the
replacement of Xenon lamps must be car-
ried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. Working with
Xenon lamps demands extreme caution
because the headlamp is equipped with a
high voltage unit.
192
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General.................................................................................................. 194
Tyre pressure........................................................................................ 198
Warning triangle* and spare wheel * .................................................... 199
Changing wheels................................................................................... 201
Emergency puncture repair*................................................................. 203
WHEELS AND TYRES
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
194
Driving characteristics and tyres
The tyres greatly affect the car's driving cha-
racteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre
pressure and speed rating are important for
how the car performs.
When changing tyres, ensure that tyres of the
same type and dimensions, and preferably also
the same make, are fitted to all four wheels.
Follow the recommended tyre pressures
specified on the tyre pressure label, see
page 198.
Designation of dimensions
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.
Example: 205/55R16 91 W.
205 Tyre width (mm)
55 Ratio between tyre wall height and
tyre width (%)
R Radial ply
16 Rim diameter in inches (")
91 Tyre load index (in this case 615 kg)
W Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed (in this case 270 km/h).
Speed ratings
The car is approved as a whole, which means
that dimensions and speed ratings must not
differ from those specified on the vehicle reg-
istration document. The only exception to
these conditions is winter tyres (both those
with metal studs and those without). If such a
tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster
than the speed rating of the tyre (for example,
class Q can be driven at a maximum of
160 km/h).
Remember that traffic regulations determine
how fast a car can be driven, not the speed
class of the tyres.
Note! Maximum permitted speeds indicated.
Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
T 190 km/h
H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h
W 270 km/h
Y 300 km/h
New tyres
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they
begin to harden at the same time as the friction
capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate.
For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as
possible when you replace them. This is espe-
cially important with regard to winter tyres. The
last four digits in the sequence mean the week
and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's
DOT marking (Department of Transportation),
and this is stated with four digits, for example
1510. The tyre in the illustration was manufac-
tured in week 15 of 2010.
Tyre age
All tyres older than six years should be checked
by an expert even if they seem undamaged.
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
195
The reason for this is that tyres age and decom-
pose, even if they are hardly ever or never used.
The function can therefore be affected due to
the tyre's constituent materials being broken
down. In such a case the tyre should then not
be used. This also applies to spare tyres, winter
tyres and tyres saved for future use. Examples
of external signs which indicate that the tyre is
unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.
The age of the tyre can be determined by the
DOT marking, see previous illustration.
More even wear and maintenance
The correct tyre pressure results in more even
wear, see page 198. Driving style, tyre pres-
sure, climate and road condition affect how
quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif-
ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear
patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can
be switched with each other. A suitable dis-
tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km
and then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recom-
mends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop for checking if you are uncertain
about tread depth. If significant differences in
wear (>1 mm difference in tread depth)
between tyres have already occurred, the least
worn tyres must always be placed on the rear.
Understeer is normally easier to correct than
oversteer, and leads to the car continuing for-
wards in a straight line rather than having the
rear end skidding to one side, resulting in pos-
sible complete loss of control over the car. This
is why it is important for the rear wheels never
to lose grip before the front wheels.
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging
up, and not standing up.
Tyres with tread wear indicators
G020323
Tread wear indicators.
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless
bands across the width of the tread. On the
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear
Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down
to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height
with the tread wear indicators. Change to new
tyres as soon as possible. Remember that
tyres with little tread depth provide very poor
grip in rain and snow.
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with specific
winter tyre dimensions. Tyre dimensions are
dependent on engine variant. When driving on
winter tyres, they must be fitted to all four
wheels.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo
dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types
are most suitable.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500-1000 km, so that the studs settle properly
into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and espe-
cially the studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-
peratures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. It is therefore
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
196
recommended not to drive on winter tyres that
have a tread depth of less than 4 mm.
Snow chains
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels. This also applies to all-wheel-drive
cars.
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-
lent chains designed for the car model, and
tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of
uncertainty Volvo recommends that you
consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The
wrong snow chains may cause serious
damage to your car and lead to an accident.
Rims and wheel nuts
Only use wheel rims that are tested and
approved by Volvo and which are included in
the Volvo genuine accessories range.
Standard wheel nuts.
Bulge acorn wheel nuts.
There are two types of wheel nut, depending
on whether the wheel rims are made of steel or
aluminium.
1. Tighten the wheel nuts of model (1) to 110
Nm. Tighten the wheel nuts of model (2) to
130 Nm.
2. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
IMPORTANT
The wheel nuts (1) should be tightened to
110 Nm and (2) to 130 Nm respectively.
Overtightening can damage the nuts and
the bolts.
Steel rims – standard wheel nuts (1)
Steel rims are normally mounted with the
standard wheel nuts, but the bulge acorn vari-
ety may also be used.
WARNING
Never use standard nuts for aluminium rims.
The wheel could come loose.
Aluminium rims – bulge acorn wheel nuts
(2)
Only use the bulge acorn variety of nuts with
aluminium rims.
NOTE
These nuts may also be used with steel rims.
Locking wheel nuts
Locking wheel nuts can be used on both alu-
minium and steel rims. If steel rims with locking
wheel nuts are used in combination with wheel
covers, the locking wheel nut should be moun-
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
197
ted on the bolt nearest the air valve. Otherwise
the wheel cover cannot be fitted to the rim.
NOTE
Tighten the lockable wheel nuts to 110 Nm.
Spare wheel Temporary Spare*
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only
intended for use temporarily and must be
replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as pos-
sible. The car's handling may be altered by the
use of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is
smaller than the normal wheel. The car's
ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay
attention to high kerbs and do not machine
wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the
front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the
same time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive on
the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare
wheel must not be repaired. The correct tyre
pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the
tyre pressure table, see page 299.
IMPORTANT
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare
wheel on the car.
IMPORTANT
The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.
Summer and winter wheels
G020325
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
When summer and winter wheels are changed,
see page 201, the wheels should be marked
with which side of the car they were mounted
on, for example L for left and R for right. Tyres
with a tread pattern which are designed to only
turn in one direction have the direction of rota-
tion marked with an arrow.
The tyre must always rotate in the same direc-
tion throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only
be switched between front and rear positions,
never between left and right-hand sides, or
vice versa.
If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, the car's
braking characteristics and capacity to force
rain, snow and slush out of the way are
adversely affected.
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to
decrease the risk of skidding).
Volvo recommends that you contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop for checking if you are
uncertain about tread depth.
07 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
07
198
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Recommended tyre pressure
G020791
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
pillar shows which pressures the tyres should
have at different load and speed conditions.
Tyre pressure for the car's recommended
tyre size
ECO pressure
1
Spare tyre pressure (Temporary Spare).
Checking the tyre pressure
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a
natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also
varies depending on ambient temperature.
Even after several kilometres of driving, the
tyres warm up and the pressure increases. So
air must not be released if the pressure is
checked when the tyres are warm. While the
pressure must be increased if it is too low.
Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel con-
sumption, shorten tyre lifespan and impair the
car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre
pressure that is too low can also result in the
tyres overheating and disintegrating.
For information on the correct tyre pressure,
refer to the tyre pressure table. The specified
tyre pressures refer to "cold tyres". ("Cold
tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera-
ture as the ambient temperature.)
Fuel economy, ECO pressure
At speeds under 160 km/h the general tyre
pressure for maximum load is recommended
in order to obtain optimum fuel economy.
Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road
noise and steering characteristics.
DRIVe*
An important detail in connection with environ-
mentally-conscious driving is to use the right
type of tyres and to drive with the correct air
pressure inside them.
Dimensions
When fitting new tyres, the same type and
brand as the car was equipped with from the
factory are recommended - they are designed
for low fuel consumption.
The 195/65 R15 and 205/55 R16 dimensions
generally provide a slightly lower consumption
than wider variants.
Pressure
Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel con-
sumption. For this reason, check the pressure
in the tyres regularly.
By using so-called ECO pressure
2
fuel con-
sumption is minimised. A certain impact on ride
comfort, road noise and steering characteris-
tics may be experienced, but this does not
affect safety.
See the decal with the recommended tyre
pressure adjacent to the driver's door pillar.
1
ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.
2
The pressure that is recommended for maximum load.
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle* and spare wheel *
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
199
Warning triangle
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning
triangle*. Place the warning triangle in a suita-
ble place with regard to the traffic.
1. Undo the case containing the warning tri-
angle, it is secured with Velcro straps. Take
the warning triangle from the case.
2. Lower the warning triangle's support legs.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
firmly secured in the cargo area after use.
Spare wheel* and jack *
The car's original jack*
The original jack must only be used for chang-
ing wheels. The jack's thread should always be
well greased. The spare wheel* plus jack* and
wheel wrench* are stored under the floor in the
cargo area.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that
belongs to the car model in question, which
is indicated on the jack's label.
The label also indicates the jack's maximum
lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting
height.
Taking out the spare wheel
1. Fold the rear edge of the floor mat forward.
2. Release the spare wheel and lift it out.
3. Take out the jack* plus crank and the wheel
wrench*.
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle* and spare wheel *
07
200
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Putting the spare wheel* and jack* into
the cargo area
1. Crank the jack (3) to halfway in order that
the jack shall fit horizontally in the bracket.
2. Fold in the handle (6) and place the wheel
wrench (2) on the jack.
3. Put the jack (3) back in the hole on the right
(4). Fasten the spare wheel (1) in the hole
on the left (5).
Tools - returning into place
Tools and jack* must be returned into place in
the correct manner after use.
For cars equipped with spare wheel, the
jack must be cranked so that it fits into the
spare wheel.
For cars equipped with emergency punc-
ture repair kit, the jack must be fully
cranked together and returned into the
foam block.
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the
intended location in the car's cargo area
when not in use.
First aid*
A case with first aid equipment is located in the
cargo area.
07 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
201
Removing wheels
G020331
Set up the warning triangle if a wheel must be
changed at a busy location. Make sure that the
car and jack are on a firm horizontal surface.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the
threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it
is free from dirt.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that
belongs to the car model in question, which
is indicated on the jack's label.
The label also indicates the jack's maximum
lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting
height.
1. Take out the spare wheel*, jack* and wheel
wrench* that are located under the carpet
in the cargo area. If another jack is
selected, see page 219.
2. Apply the parking brake and engage
reverse gear, or position P if the car has an
automatic gearbox.
3. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground.
Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.
4. Cars with steel rims have removable wheel
covers. Prize off the wheel cover with the
end of the wheel wrench, or pull it off by
hand.
5. Loosen the wheel nuts ½-1 turn anticlock-
wise with the wheel wrench.
G020332
Telescopic wheel wrench.
WARNING
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the jack
and the car's jacking point.
6. There are two jacking points on each side
of the car. There is a recess in the plastic
cover at each point. Crank the foot of the
jack down so it is pressed squarely on the
ground. Check that the jack is seated cor-
rectly in the intended jacking point, as illus-
trated, and that the base is located directly
under it.
07 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
07
202
IMPORTANT
The ground must be firm, smooth and level.
7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.
Remove the wheel nuts and lift off the
wheel.
Fitting the wheel
1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel
and hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts.
3. Lower the car so that the wheel cannot
rotate.
4. Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel nuts are tightened
properly.
Standard wheel nuts - tightening tor-
que: 110 Nm
Domed wheel nuts - tightening torque:
130 Nm
Check the torque with a torque wrench.
5. Put on the wheel cover (steel rim).
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised
on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
Ensure that passengers wait with the car -
or preferably a crash barrier - between them
and the road.
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
203
Emergency puncture repair, general
information
The emergency puncture repair kit is used to
seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust
the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor
and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as
a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle
must be replaced before its expiration date and
after use.
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc-
tured in the tread.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in
the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in
the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency
puncture repair kit if they have larger slits,
cracks or similar damage.
12V sockets for the compressor are located by
the centre console in the front, by the rear seat
and in the cargo area*. Choose the electrical
socket that is nearest the punctured tyre.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been
used. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced.
Taking out the emergency puncture
repair kit
The emergency puncture repair kit with com-
pressor and tools are stored under the floor in
the cargo area.
1. Fold up the cargo area floor.
2. Lift up the emergency puncture repair kit.
Overview
G020400
Decal, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
204
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
Sealing punctured tyres
G019723
For information on the function of the parts, see
preceding illustration.
1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture
repair kit.
2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted
speed and affix it to the steering wheel.
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the
case of contact with skin, wash away the
fluid with soap and water.
3.
Check that the switch is in position 0 and
locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use.
The seal is broken automatically when the
bottle is screwed in.
4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the
bottle's stopper.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Screw the bottle into its holder.
6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bot-
tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and
start the car.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the com-
pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness
arise then the compressor must be
switched off immediately. The journey
should not be continued. Contacting an
authorised tyre centre is recommended.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure
drops after approximately 30 seconds.
8.
Flick the switch to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
205
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole
in the tyre is too big. The journey should not
be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre
centre is recommended.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum
pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is
3.5 bar.
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
cable from the 12 V socket.
12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit
the valve cap.
13. As soon as possible, drive approximately 3
km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so that
the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
Rechecking the repair and pressure
1. Reconnect the equipment.
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
3. If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insuf-
ficiently sealed. The journey should not be
continued. Contact a tyre centre.
4. If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar,
the tyre must be inflated to the pressure
specified on the tyre pressure decal.
Release air using the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable. Refit the dust cap.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must
be replaced after use. Volvo recommends
that this replacement is performed by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
6. Return the emergency puncture repair kit
to the cargo area.
7. Volvo recommends that you drive to the
nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre.
Advise the workshop that the tyre contains
sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been
used. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced.
Inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated by the
compressor.
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
and locate the cable and air hose.
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bot-
tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine run-
ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf-
ficient ventilation.
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
206
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's
12 V sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch
to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on
the tyre pressure decal. (Release air using
the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres-
sure is too high.)
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable.
7. Refit the dust cap.
Changing the sealing fluid canister
Replace the bottle before the expiration date
has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-
mentally hazardous waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural
rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
NOTE
Leave the container at a collection point for
storing dangerous waste.
07 Wheels and tyres
07
207
208
Cleaning................................................................................................ 210
Touching up paintwork......................................................................... 214
Rustproofing......................................................................................... 215
CAR CARE
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
210
Washing the car
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty. Use
car shampoo. Dirt and road salt can lead to
corrosion.
Do not park the car in direct sunlight.
Washing a car with hot paintwork can
cause permanent paintwork damage.
Wash the car in a car wash with waste
water separator.
Hose down the underbody thoroughly.
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
If the dirt is difficult to dislodge, wash the
car using a cold degreasing agent.
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or
a water scraper.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functional-
ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for
example.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have
condensation on the inside of the lens. This
is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting
is designed to withstand this. Condensation
is normally vented out of the lamp when it
has been switched on for a time.
Cleaning the wiper blades
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,
as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,
impair the service life of wiper blades.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg-
ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car
shampoo.
Do not use any strong solvents.
Removing bird droppings
Wash away bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain
chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork
very quickly. This discoloration can only be
removed by a specialist.
Chromed wheels
IMPORTANT
Rim cleaning agents can cause stains on
chrome-plated wheels. Wash using a
sponge, car shampoo and plenty of luke-
warm water.
Automatic car washes
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick
way of washing the car, but it can never replace
a proper handwashing. The brushes of an auto-
matic car wash cannot reach everywhere.
IMPORTANT
Washing by hand is gentler to the paintwork
than an automatic car wash. Paintwork is
also more sensitive when it is new. For this
reason, handwashing is recommended dur-
ing the first few months with a new car.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, use
sweeping movements and make sure that the
nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the
surface of the car (the distance applies to all
exterior parts).
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
211
IMPORTANT
Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt.
When using a pressure washer: Make sure
that the nozzle of the pressure washer is not
closer than 30 cm to the bodywork. Do not
spray directly onto the locks.
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the
car, including the parking brake, to ensure
that moisture and corrosion do not attack
the brake linings and reduce braking per-
formance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush.
This heats and dries the brake pads. Do the
same thing after starting in very damp or cold
weather.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components (such as glossy trim mouldings).
When using such a cleaning agent the instruc-
tions must be followed carefully.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rub-
ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec-
essary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
or to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it is
at least one year old. However, the car can be
waxed before this time. Do not polish or wax
the car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit.
More stubborn stains can be removed using
fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq-
uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the
packaging carefully. Many preparations con-
tain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Only paint treatment recommended by
Volvo should be used. Other treatment such
as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre
sealing or similar could damage the paint-
work. Paintwork damage caused by such
treatments is not covered by Volvo war-
ranty.
Water-repellent coating*
Never use products such as car wax,
degreaser or similar on glass surfa-
ces as this could ruin their water-repellent
properties.
Take care when cleaning so as not to damage
the glass surface.
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.
There is natural wear of the water-repellent
coating.
NOTE
Treatment with a special finishing agent
available from Volvo dealers is recom-
mended in order to maintain the water-
repellent properties. This should be used
first after three years and then each year.
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
212
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-
ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly
and follow the instructions included with the
car care product.
Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning
agents.
Carpets and cargo area
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a
vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
Each inlay mat is secured with pins.
Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and
lift the mat straight up.
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at
each pin.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat
in the driver area is firmly affixed and
secured in the pins in order to avoid getting
caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for
stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
mats should be cleaned with agents recom-
mended by your Volvo dealer!
Treatment of stains on textile upholstery
and headliner
A special fabric cleaning agent, available from
authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to
avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of
the upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the
fabric upholstery.
Treating stains on leather upholstery
Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-free
and is treated to preserve its original appear-
ance.
Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau-
tiful patina over time. The leather is refined and
processed so that it retains its natural charac-
teristics. It is given a protective coating, but
regular cleaning is required in order to maintain
both characteristics and appearance. Volvo
offers a comprehensive product for the clean-
ing and treatment of leather upholstery which,
when used in accordance with the instructions,
preserves the leather's protective coating.
After a period of use the natural appearance of
the leather will nevertheless emerge, depend-
ing more or less on the surface texture of the
leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather
and shows that it is a natural product.
To achieve best results Volvo recommends
cleaning and the application of protective
cream once to four times per year (or more if
necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is avail-
able from your Volvo dealer.
IMPORTANT
Certain items of coloured clothing (for
example, jeans and suede garments)
may stain the upholstery.
Never use strong solvents. Such prod-
ucts may damage fabric, vinyl and
leather upholstery.
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened
sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular
movements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the
stain. Do not rub.
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and
allow the leather to dry completely.
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
213
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery
Vacuuming is important prior to using leather
care agents.
1. Pour a small amount of the protective
cream on the felted cloth and massage in
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular
movements on the leather.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes
before use.
The leather has now been given improved pro-
tection against stains and improved UV pro-
tection.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects may damage the leather, (e.g.
rings).
Washing instructions for the leather
steering wheel
Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-mois-
tened sponge and neutral soap.
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather steering wheel with protective plas-
tic.
Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care
agents are recommended for best results.
If the steering wheel has stains:
Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and
blood)
Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5%
ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use a
solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)
Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)
1. Same procedure as group I.
2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.
Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)
1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.
2. Same procedure as group I.
Treating stains on interior plastic, metal
and wood parts
A special cleaning agent, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
parts and surfaces. Do not scrape or rub stains.
Never use strong stain removers.
Cleaning seatbelts
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
textile cleaning agent is available from your
Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry
before allowing it to retract.
08 Car care
Touching up paintwork
08
214
Paintwork
Paint is an important part of the car's rust-
proofing and should therefore be checked reg-
ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged
paintwork should be rectified immediately. The
most common types of paintwork damage are
stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
edges of wings and doors.
Colour code
Data plate.
Code for car colour
It is important that the correct colour is used.
For product decal location, see page 286.
Stone chips and scratches
G020345
Before touching up paintwork, the car must be
clean and dry and at a temperature above
15 °C.
Materials
Primer in a can
Spray can or touch-up pen
1
Masking tape.
Minor stone chips and scratches
If the stone chip has not penetrated to the bare
metal and there is an undamaged colour coat,
you can paint straight after cleaning the dam-
aged area.
If the stone chip has penetrated to the
bare metal
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a
brush once the primer is dry.
3. For scratches, proceed as above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect
the undamaged paintwork.
4. After a few days, polish the touched-up
areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount
of lapping paste.
1
Follow the instructions contained in the touch-up pen's packaging.
08 Car care
Rustproofing
08
215
Inspection and maintenance
Your car has already received a thorough and
complete rustproofing at the factory. Parts of
the body are made of galvanised sheet metal.
The underbody is protected by a wear-resis-
tant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, pene-
trating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the
members, cavities and closed sections.
Maintain the car's rustproofing.
Keep the car clean. Hose down the under-
body. If using a pressure washer, keep the
nozzle at least 30 cm from the painted sur-
faces.
Regularly check and touch-up the rust-
proofing treatment as necessary.
The car's rustproofing does not normally
require treatment for approximately 12 years.
After this period, it should be treated at three-
year intervals. If the car needs further treat-
ment, Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop for assistance.
216
Volvo service......................................................................................... 218
Self-maintenance.................................................................................. 219
Bonnet and engine compartment......................................................... 220
Oils and fluids....................................................................................... 222
Wiper blades......................................................................................... 228
Battery................................................................................................... 230
Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 234
Fuses..................................................................................................... 241
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
09 Maintenance and service
Volvo service
09
218
Volvo service programme
Before the car left the factory, it was thoroughly
test driven. It was checked again in accord-
ance with Volvo Car Corporation regulations
before it was handed over to you.
To keep your Volvo as safe and reliable as pos-
sible, follow the Volvo service programme
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo also recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to perform the
service and maintenance work. Volvo work-
shops have the personnel, special tools and
service literature to guarantee the highest qual-
ity of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Special service measures
Certain service measures which affect the car's
electrical system can only be performed using
electronic equipment specially developed for
your car. For this reason, Volvo recommends
that you always contact an authorised Volvo
workshop before beginning or performing
service work that affects the electrical system.
09 Maintenance and service
Self-maintenance
09
219
Before starting work on the car
Battery
Check that the battery cables are correctly
connected and tightened.
Never disconnect the battery when the engine
is running (e.g. if replacing the battery).
Never use a quick charger to charge the bat-
tery. The battery cables must be disconnected
when charging the battery.
The battery contains acid that is both corrosive
and toxic. It is therefore important to handle the
battery in an environmentally correct manner.
Let your Volvo dealer assist you.
WARNING
The ignition system has very high voltage
and output. The voltage in the ignition sys-
tem is highly dangerous. The ignition must
therefore always be switched off for work in
the engine compartment.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coils
when the ignition is on or the engine is hot.
Raising the car
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a
jack is selected other than the one recom-
mended by Volvo, follow the instructions for
use supplied with the equipment.
If the car is raised with a workshop jack; posi-
tion the jack against the front edge on the sub-
frame.
Do not damage the splashguard under the
engine. Ensure that the jack is positioned so
that the car cannot slide off the jack. Always
use axle stands or similar.
If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshop
lift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms are
fixed under the lifting points. See preceding
illustration.
Check regularly
Check the following at regular intervals, for
example, when refuelling:
Coolant – The level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks on the expansion
tank.
Engine oil – The level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks.
Power steering fluid – The level must be
between the MIN and MAX marks.
Washer fluid – The reservoir should be well
filled. Fill washer fluid with antifreeze at
temperatures around freezing point.
Brake and clutch fluid – The level must be
between the MIN and MAX marks.
WARNING
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment, behind
the radiator) may start automatically some
after the engine has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
09 Maintenance and service
Bonnet and engine compartment
09
220
Opening the bonnet
G020793
The illustration shows a left-hand drive car.
1. Pull the handle on the far left under the
instrument panel. (In right-hand drive cars
the handle is on the far right.) You will hear
when the catch releases.
2. Insert your hand under the centre of the
front edge of the bonnet and press the
safety catch to the right.
3. Open the bonnet.
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed.
Engine compartment
Washer fluid reservoir (4-cyl.)
Coolant expansion tank
Reservoir for the power steering fluid (con-
cealed behind the headlamp)
Dipstick
1
for engine oil
2
Radiator
Radiator fan
Washer fluid reservoir (5-cyl.)
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand
drive)
Filling the engine oil
2
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand
drive)
1
Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).
2
The location varies depending on engine alternative.
09 Maintenance and service
Bonnet and engine compartment
09
221
Battery
Relay and fuse box
Air filter
2
2
The location varies depending on engine alternative.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
09
222
Checking the engine oil
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
Always use oil of the prescribed grade.
Check the oil level frequently and change
the oil regularly. The engine will be damaged
if lower grade oil is used or if the car is driven
with the oil level too low.
When driving under adverse conditions, see
page 292.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard to
service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service inter-
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-
ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of
low/high oil level or low/high oil pressure. Cer-
tain variants have an oil pressure sensor, and
then the lamp for oil pressure is used. Other
variants have an oil level sensor, and then the
driver is informed via the warning symbol in the
centre of the instrument unit as well as by dis-
play texts. Certain models have both variants.
Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord-
ance with the intervals specified in the Service
and Warranty Booklet.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is
permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con-
ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a
higher grade, see page 292.
For capacities, see page 293 and onwards.
Engine with oil dipstick
1
Petrol engine.
Dipstick, petrol engines.
Filler pipe, engine oil.
1
Only applies to petrol and 4-cyl. diesel.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
09
223
Diesel engine.
Dipstick, 4-cyl diesel engines.
Filler pipe, engine oil.
Checking the oil level in a new car is especially
important before the first scheduled oil change.
Volvo recommends checking the oil level every
2 500 km. The most accurate measurements
are made on a cold engine before starting. The
measurement will be inaccurate if taken imme-
diately after the engine is switched off. The
dipstick will indicate that the level is too low
because the oil has not had time to flow down
into the oil sump.
G020336
The oil level must be within the area marked on the
dipstick.
Measurement and filling if required
1. Ensure that the car is level. After switching
off the engine it is important to wait
5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back
to the sump.
2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick.
3. Re-insert the dipstick.
4. Pull it out and check the level.
5.
If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litres
should be added. If the level is significantly
below, then an additional amount is
required.
6. If required, check the level again, do it after
driving a short distance. Then repeat steps
1 - 4.
WARNING
Never fill above the MAX mark. The level
should never be above MAX or below MIN
as this could lead to engine damage.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
09
224
For engines with electronic oil level
sensor
2
Filler pipe.
3
You do not need to take action with respect to
the engine oil level before a message is shown
in the display, see the illustration below.
Message and graph in the display.
Message
Engine oil level
The oil level is checked using the electronic oil
level gauge with the thumbwheel when the
engine is switched off, see page 65.
WARNING
If the message Oil service required is
shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may
be too high.
IMPORTANT
In the event of the message Oil level low,
Fill oil
, only fill with 0.5 litres.
NOTE
The oil level is only detected by the system
during driving. The system cannot directly
detect changes when the oil is filled or
drained. The car must be driven
about 30 km before the oil level display is
correct.
WARNING
Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4)
appears as shown in the illustration below.
The level must never be above MAX or
below MIN, as this could lead to engine
damage.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
2
Only applies to 5-cyl. diesel.
3
Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
09
225
Measuring the oil level
If the oil level needs to be checked then it
should be carried out in accordance with the
sequence below.
1.
Activate key position II, see page 154.
2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand
stalk switch to position
Engine oil level
Please wait...
.
> You will then see information displayed
about the engine oil level.
The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill
more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recom-
mended filling level is 4.
Washer fluid, topping up
G020335
Location of washer fluid reservoir
4
.
The windscreen and headlamp washers share
a common reservoir.
For capacities, see the table Fluids on page
295.
Filler cap on 4-cylinder engines and diesel.
Filler cap on 5-cylinder engines.
Add washer fluid with antifreeze in the winter
so that the fluid does not freeze in the pump,
reservoir and hoses.
NOTE
Mix concentrated washer fluid with water
before filling.
TIP! Clean the wiper blades when topping up
washer fluid.
Checking and topping up the coolant
G020334
When topping up the coolant, follow the
instructions on the packaging. It is important
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
water is correct for the prevailing weather con-
ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk
4
Depending on engine alternative.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
09
226
of freezing increases with both too little and too
much coolant concentrate.
IMPORTANT
A high content of chlorine, chlorides
and other salts may cause corrosion in
the cooling system.
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
Mix the coolant with approved quality
tap water. In the event of any doubt
about water quality, used ready-mixed
coolant in accordance with Volvo rec-
ommendations.
When changing coolant/replacing cool-
ing system components, flush the cool-
ing system clean with approved quality
tap water or flush with ready-mixed
coolant.
The engine must only be run with a well-
filled cooling system. Otherwise, tem-
peratures that are too high may occur
resulting in the risk of damage (cracks)
in the cylinder head.
For capacities and for standards regarding
water quality, see page 295.
Check the coolant regularly
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is
not filled sufficiently, high local temperatures
could occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks)
to the cylinder head. Top up the coolant when
the level falls to the MIN mark.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the expan-
sion tank cap slowly to gently release the
overpressure.
NOTE
The engine must only be run with a well-
filled cooling system. Otherwise, tempera-
tures that are too high may occur resulting
in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder
head.
Checking and topping up the brake and
clutch fluid
G020333
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
09
227
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-
voir
5
. The fluid level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks. Check the level regularly.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
For capacities and recommended fluid grade,
see the table Fluids on page 295.
The fluid should be changed annually on cars
driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent
braking, such as driving in mountains or tropi-
cal climates with high humidity.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
be investigated.
Checking and topping up the power
steering fluid
NOTE
Check the level frequently.
The fluid does not require changing. For
capacities and recommended fluid grade, see
page 295.
If a fault should arise in the power steering sys-
tem or if the car is without power and must be
towed, it can still be steered. However, the
steering will be much heavier than normal and
it will require more effort to turn the steering
wheel.
5
Location dependent on whether car is left or right-hand drive.
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades
09
228
Wiper blades
G020330
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than on
the other side.
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see
page 210.
IMPORTANT
Check the wiper blades regularly.
Neglected maintenance shortens the serv-
ice life of the wiper blades.
Replacing the wiper blades, windscreen
1. Lift up the wiper arm.
2. Press the button located on the wiper
blade mounting and pull straight out (1),
parallel with the wiper arm.
3. Slide in (2) the new wiper blade until a
"click" is heard.
> Check (3) that the blade is firmly instal-
led and fold down the wiper arm.
Changing the rear window wiper blade
G014732
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
2. Detach the wiper blade by pulling it
towards the rear window.
3. Press the new wiper blade into position.
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades
09
229
> Check that it is firmly installed and fold
back the wiper arm.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
09
230
Operation
The service life and function of the battery is
influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving con-
ditions and climatic conditions.
Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running.
Check that the cables to the battery are
correctly connected and properly tight-
ened.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is con-
nected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and cli-
mate. Battery starting capacity decreases
gradually with time and therefore needs to
be recharged if the car is not used for a
longer time or when it is only driven short
distances. Extreme cold further limits star-
ting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom-
mended or that the battery is connected to
a battery charger with automatic trickle
charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
Symbols on the battery
Use protective goggles.
Further information in the
owner's manual.
Store the battery out of
the reach of children.
The battery contains cor-
rosive acid.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
231
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Risk of explosion.
Must be taken for recy-
cling.
NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in an
environmentally correct manner as it con-
tains lead.
Changing the battery
Removal
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
2. Wait at least 5 minutes before touching any
electrical terminals.
> The car's electrical system needs to
store the necessary information to the
control modules.
3. Remove the cover.
4. Detach the black negative cable.
WARNING
Connect and remove the positive and neg-
ative cables in the correct order.
5. Detach the red positive cable.
6. Undo the front wall of the battery box using
a screwdriver.
7. Detach the ventilation hose from the bat-
tery.
8. Release the clamp securing the battery.
9. Remove the battery.
Fitting
1. Fit the battery into position.
2. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery.
3. Connect the ventilation hose.
> Check that it is correctly connected to
both battery and outlet in the body.
4. Reinstall the front wall of the battery box.
5. Connect the red positive cable.
6. Connect the black negative cable.
7. Attach the cover to the battery.
For more information on the car's battery - see
pages 181 and 301.
DRIVe Start/Stop*
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped
with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful
battery for starting and one standby battery
that helps during the Start/Stop function's star-
ting sequence.
For more information on Start/Stop - see
page 165.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
09
232
Battery Start Standby
Cold start
capacity
A
,
CCA (A)
760 120
Dimen-
sions
B
,
L×W×H
(mm)
278×175×19
0
150×90×106
Capacity
(Ah)
70 8
A
In accordance with the SAE standard.
B
Largest possible size.
NOTE
The higher the current take-off in the car
(extra cooling/heating, etc.) the more
the batteries must be charged =
increased fuel consumption.
When the capacity of the battery has
fallen below the lowest permissible level
then the Start/Stop function is disen-
gaged.
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due
to high current take-off means:
The engine auto-starts
1
without the driver
depressing the clutch pedal.
Location of the batteries
1. Battery
2
2. Standby battery.
The standby battery normally requires no more
service than the normal battery that is used for
starting. A workshop should be contacted in
the event of questions or problems - an author-
ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the Start/Stop function may temporar-
ily cease to work after the connection of an
external battery or battery charger:
The negative battery terminal on the
car's main battery must never be used
for connecting an external battery or
battery charger - only the car chassis
may be used as the grounding point.
See the section "Start assistance" - for a
description of how the cable clamps must
be attached.
1
Auto-start can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.
2
The battery is described in detail on page 230.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
09
233
NOTE
If the battery has become so discharged
that everything is "black" and in principle
the car does not have all the normal electri-
cal functions and the engine is subsequently
started using an external battery or battery
charger, then the Start/Stop function will be
activated. It will then be possible for the
engine to be auto-stopped but in the event
of an auto-stop the Start/Stop function may
fail to auto-start the engine due to inade-
quate capacity in the battery.
The battery must first be charged in order to
ensure a successful auto-start after an auto-
stop. At an outside temperature of +15 °C
the battery needs to be charged for at least
1 hour. At a lower outside temperature a
charging time of 3-4 hours is recom-
mended. The recommendation is that the
battery is charged using an external battery
charger.
If this is not possible then the recommen-
dation is to temporarily deactivate the
Start/Stop function until the battery has
been adequately recharged.
For more information about recharging the
battery, see the section "Battery" in the
chapter "Maintenance and service".
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
09
234
General
All bulb specifications are given on page 301.
The following list contains locations of bulbs
and other light sources that are specialised or
unsuitable for changing except at a workshop:
Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon
lamps)
Xenon headlamps (Xenon lamps)
Daytime running lights (DRL) in the spoiler
Direction indicators, door mirror and
approach lighting
Reading lamps, courtesy lighting and glo-
vebox lighting
General interior lighting in the roof
Brake light
WARNING
On cars with Xenon headlamps, the
replacement of Xenon lamps must be car-
ried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. Working with
Xenon lamps demands extreme caution
because the headlamp is equipped with a
high voltage unit.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease and oil from your fin-
gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the
reflector and then causing damage.
Changing front bulbs
G019599
All front bulbs (except for fog lamps) are
changed by first removing the lamp housing
from the engine compartment.
Removing the lamp housing
1. Remove the remote control key and turn
the light switch to position 0.
2. Withdraw the lamp housing's locking pin.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con-
nector.
3. Pull the lamp housing to the side and then
forward.
4. Unplug the connector by pressing down
the clip with a thumb while moving out the
connector with the other hand.
G019600
5. Lift out the lamp housing and place it on a
soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
09
``
235
Fitting the lamp housing
1. Plug in the connector and refit the lamp
housing and locking pin. Check that the pin
is correctly inserted.
2. Check the lighting.
The lamp housing must be plugged in and
secured in place before the lighting is switched
on or the remote control key inserted into the
ignition switch.
Dipped beam
G019131
Removing the cover and bulb
1. Undo the whole lamp housing, see
page 234.
2. Bend aside the catches and remove the
cover.
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Release the spring clip securing the bulb.
Press it in/down.
5. Pull out the bulb.
G019133
Fitting a new bulb
1. Fit the new bulb. It can only fit in one posi-
tion.
2. Press the spring clip in/up and then slightly
to the right in order to snap it into position.
3. Press the connector back on.
4. Refit the plastic cover.
5. Refit the lamp housing, see page 234.
Main beam, Halogen
G019136
The illustration shows a halogen bulb.
1. Undo the whole lamp housing, see
page 234.
2. Undo the cover, located above the lamp
housing, by turning it anticlockwise.
3. Left-hand headlamp:
Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Right-hand headlamp:
Turn the bulb holder clockwise.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
09
236
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
4. Withdraw the bulb holder and change the
bulb.
5. Refit the bulb holder. It can only be refitted
in one position.
6. Refit the cover, located above the lamp
housing, by turning it clockwise.
7. Refit the lamp housing, see page 234.
Position/parking lamps
G019145
1. Undo the lamp housing, see page 234.
2. Undo the cover, located above the lamp
housing, by turning it anticlockwise.
3. Withdraw the bulb holder and change the
bulb.
4. Press the bulb holder back on. A "click" is
heard when the bulb holder is fitted cor-
rectly.
5. Refit the cover, located above the lamp
housing, by turning it clockwise.
6. Refit the lamp housing, see page 234.
NOTE
ABL headlamps* have a position lamp (LED)
that cannot be replaced.
Direction indicators
G019150
1. Undo the lamp housing, see page 234.
2. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and
remove it.
3. To remove the bulb from the bulb holder,
press the bulb in and turn it anticlockwise.
4. Fit a new bulb and refit the bulb holder into
the lamp housing.
5. Refit the lamp housing, see page 234.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
09
``
237
Side marker lamps
G018050
1. Undo the lamp housing, see page 234.
2. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and
withdraw it. Replace the bulb.
3. Refit the bulb holder. It can only fit in one
position.
4. Refit the lamp housing, see page 234.
Front fog lamps
G019605
1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote
control key to position 0.
2. Undo the cover by inserting a screwdriver
as illustrated (vertically) and continue to
press vertically in order to undo the clip
inside the cover.
3. Grip the edge of the cover and pull straight
out.
4. Unscrew the lamp housing screw and pull
it out.
5. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and remove it.
6. Fit a new bulb by turning clockwise. (The
profile of the bulb holder corresponds to
the profile of the foot of the bulb.)
7.
Refit the bulb holder. The TOP mark on the
bulb holder must always be upward.
Removing the bulb holder
G019166
All bulbs in the rear lamp cluster are replaced
from inside the cargo area.
1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote
control key to position 0.
2. Remove the cover (A or B) in the left/right-
hand panel to access the bulbs.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
09
238
3. The bulbs are located in separate bulb
holders.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb holder.
5. Press the catches together and pull out the
bulb holder.
6. Replace the bulb.
7. Plug in the connector.
8. Press the bulb holder into place and refit
the cover (A or B).
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken
bulb has been replaced then we recom-
mend that you visit an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Location of bulbs in the rear bulb
holder
G018058
Bulb holder.
IMPORTANT
The cable for the brake light's LED lamps is
moulded into the upper bulb holder. It shall
not be removed.
Brake light (LED)
Position lamp
Position/parking lamps
Direction indicators
Reversing lamp
Rear fog lamp (one side)
NOTE
The rear fog lamp only illuminates in the left
rear light cluster on a left-hand drive car and
in the right on a right-hand drive.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
09
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
239
Number plate lighting
G014849
1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote
control key to position 0.
2. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
3. Detach the lens carefully.
4. Replace the bulb.
5. Refit and screw in the lens.
Cargo area
G014852
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that
the lamp housing comes loose.
2. Remove the blown bulb.
3. Fit a new bulb.
Vanity mirror lighting*
G020253
Removing the mirror glass
1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower
edge, in the centre. Carefully prize up the
lug on the edge.
2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge
on the left and right-hand sides (by the
black rubber sections), and prize carefully
so that the glass comes loose in the lower
edge.
3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire
mirror glass and cover.
4. Remove the blown bulb and replace it with
a new one.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
09
240
Fitting the mirror glass
1. First, press the three lugs at top edge of
mirror glass back into position.
2. Then press the three lower lugs back into
position.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
241
General
All electrical functions and components are
fused to protect the car's electrical system
from damage by short circuiting and overload-
ing.
The fuses are in two different locations in the
car:
Relay/Fuse box in the engine compart-
ment.
Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compart-
ment.
Changing
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and blew.
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
Each fuse box has space for several spare
fuses. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then
there is a fault in the component. In which case,
Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised
Volvo workshop for this to be checked.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi-
cant damage to the electrical system and
possibly lead to fire.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
242
Relay/fuse box in the engine compartment
G007446
The fuse box has 36 fuse positions. Be sure to
replace a blown fuse with a new fuse of the
same colour and amperage.
Fuses 19-36 are of the "Mini Fuse" type.
Fuses 7-18 are of the "JCASE" type and
should be replaced by a workshop.
1
Fuses 1-6 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and
must only be replaced by a workshop.
1
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal
and fitting of fuses.
1
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
243
G020250
1. Cooling fan 50 A
2. Power steering 80 A
3. Supply to passenger compart-
ment fuse box
60 A
4. Supply to passenger compart-
ment fuse box
60 A
5. PTC element, air preheater* 80 A
6. Glow plugs (DRIVe) 60 A
Glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel) 70 A
7. ABS pump 40 A
8. ABS valves 20 A
9. Engine functions 30 A
10. Ventilation fan 40 A
11. Headlamp washers 20 A
12. Heated rear window 30 A
13. Actuator solenoid, starter
motor
30 A
14. Trailer wiring* 40 A
15. Reserve
16. Infotainment system 30 A
17. Windscreen wipers 30 A
18. Supply to passenger compart-
ment fuse box
40 A
19. Reserve
20. Horn 15 A
21. Fuel-driven additional heater,
passenger compartment
heater*
20 A
22. Reserve
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
244
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
23. Engine control module (5-cyl.
petrol), Transmission control
module (5-cyl.)
10 A
Transmission control module
(4-cyl.)
15 A
24. Heated fuel filter (5-cyl. diesel),
PTC element, oil trap (5-cyl.
diesel)
20 A
25. Central electronic module
(CEM) (Start/Stop)
10 A
26. Ignition switch 15 A
27. A/C compressor 10 A
28. Reserve
29. Front fog lamps
Daytime running lights (DRL)*
15 A
30. Coolant pump (Start/Stop) 10 A
31. Voltage regulator, alternator
(4-cyl. petrol)
10 A
32. Injectors (5-cyl. petrol), Turbo
control valve (5-cyl. diesel), Oil
level sensor (5-cyl. diesel)
Control valve, fuel flow
(DRIVe), Mass air flow sensor
(DRIVe), Control motor turbo
(DRIVe)
10 A
33. Vacuum pump (5-cyl. petrol),
Relay coil, relay, vacuum
pump (5-cyl. petrol), Engine
control module (5-cyl. diesel),
Heated fuel filter (DRIVe)
20 A
34. Ignition coils (petrol), Pressure
switch, climate control system
(5-cyl.), Control module, glow
plugs (5-cyl. diesel), EGR
emission control (5-cyl. diesel),
Fuel pump (DRIVe), Lambda-
sond (DRIVe), Engine control
module (Start/Stop), Relay
coils, relays Start/Stop
10 A
35. Relay coil, relay, climate con-
trol system, PTC element, oil
trap (5-cyl. petrol), Mass air
flow sensor (5-cyl. petrol),
Turbo control valve (5-cyl. pet-
rol), Solenoids, variable valve
timing (5-cyl. petrol), Injectors
(2.0 l petrol), EVAP valve (2.0 l
petrol), Valve, air/fuel mixture
(2.0 l petrol), Control valve, fuel
pressure (5-cyl. diesel), Engine
control module (5-cyl. diesel),
Engine EGR (DRIVe)
15 A
36. Engine control module (petrol,
DRIVe), Accelerator pedal
position sensor (5-cyl. diesel),
Lambda-sond (5-cyl. diesel)
10 A
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
245
DRIVe Start/Stop*
Location of fuses for the Start/Stop function.
No. Component A
11M/1 Engine compartment,
electrical distribution
unit
125
11M/2 Sensor, battery monitor-
ing
15
25 Central electronic mod-
ule (CEM) (Reference
voltage standby bat-
tery), diesel engine
10
For more information on DRIVe Start/Stop -
see page 165.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
246
Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compartment
G020601
The fuse box has 50 fuse positions. The fuses
are located under the glovebox. The box also
provides space for several spare fuses. Tools
for fuse replacement are located in the relay/
fuse box in the engine compartment, see
page 242.
Replacing fuses
1. Remove the trim concealing the fuse box
by pressing in the pin in the centre of the
clips (1) about one cm and then withdraw-
ing the clips.
2. Turn the two wing screws (that secure the
fuse box) (2) anticlockwise and remove
them.
3. Lower the fuse box (3) half way. Pull it
towards the seat until it stops. Lower it
completely. The fuse box can be fully
unhooked.
4. Close the fuse box in the reverse order.
5. Remove the pins from the centre of the
clips. Fit the trim and the clips. Reinsert the
pins into the clips. This expands the clips
and secures the trim.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
247
43. Telematics*, Audio system,
RTI*, Bluetooth*
15 A
44. SRS system, Engine control
module (5-cyl, DRIVe)
10 A
45. Electrical socket, passenger
compartment
15 A
46. Passenger compartment, glo-
vebox and courtesy lighting
5 A
47. Interior lighting, Remote con-
trolled garage door opener*
5 A
48. Washer, rear window 15 A
49. SRS system 10 A
50. Reserve
51. PTC element, air preheater*,
Relay coil, relay, heated fuel
filter (5-cyl. diesel), AWD
10 A
52. Transmission control module,
ABS system
5 A
53. Power steering 10 A
54. Parking assistance*, Xenon* 10 A
55. Control module Keyless* 20 A
56. Remote control receiver,
Siren*
10 A
57. Data link connector (DLC),
brake light switch
15 A
58. Main beam, right, Relay coil,
relay, auxiliary lamps*
7.5 A
59. Main beam, left 7.5 A
60. Seat heating (driver's side) 15 A
61. Seat heating (passenger side) 15 A
62. Sunroof* 20 A
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
248
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
63. Supply to rear right door 20 A
64. Reserve
65. Audio, Infotainment 5 A
66. Audio, Infotainment, Climate
control system
10 A
67. Reserve
68. Cruise control 5 A
69. Climate control system, Rain
sensor, Buttons for BLIS*,
parking assistance*, DRIVe
5 A
70. Reserve
71. Reserve
72. Reserve
73. Sunroof*, Overhead console
for interior lighting, Seatbelt
reminder, rear, Dimming, inte-
rior rearview mirror*
5 A
74. Fuel pump 15 A
75. Reserve
76. Reserve
77. Electrical socket cargo area,
Control module, accessories*
15 A
78. Reserve
79. Reversing lamp, Dimming,
interior rearview mirror (signal)
5 A
80. Reserve -
81. Supply to rear left door 20 A
82. Supply to front right door 25 A
83. Supply to front left door 25 A
84. Power seat, passenger 25 A
85. Power seat, driver 25 A
86. Interior lighting, cargo area
lighting, power seats, fuel
level display (2.0F)
5 A
09 Maintenance and service
09
249
250
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General.................................................................................................. 252
Audio functions..................................................................................... 254
Radio functions..................................................................................... 259
CD functions......................................................................................... 264
Menu structure – audio system............................................................. 267
Phone functions*................................................................................... 268
Menu structure – phone*....................................................................... 275
Bluetooth handsfree*............................................................................ 278
INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
10 Infotainment system
General
10
252
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Infotainment system
G020245
POWER - Pushbutton, audio system on/
off
Display
Keypad
MENU - Goes to the menu system
Navigation buttons
EXIT - Exits the menu system
ENTER - Selects/activates/deactivates
Infotainment is a system that integrates the
audio system and phone*. The infotainment
system can be easily operated using the con-
trol panel or the steering wheel keypad*, see
page 72. The display (2) shows messages and
information on the current function.
Audio system
On/Off
POWER (1) starts/switches off the audio sys-
tem. If the audio system is active when the
remote control key is turned to position 0 then
it continues to be active until the remote control
key is removed from the ignition switch. The
audio system is started automatically the next
time the remote control key is turned to posi-
tion I.
Menus
Some infotainment system functions are con-
trolled via a menu system. The current menu
level is shown at the top right of the display.
Menu options are shown in the middle of the
display.
MENU (4) leads to the menu system.
Up/down with the navigation button (5)
moves between menu options.
ENTER (7) selects/activates/deactivates
one of the menu options.
EXIT (6) leads back one step in the menu
structure. A long press on EXIT will exit the
menu system.
Shortcuts
Menu options are numbered and can also be
selected directly with the keypad (3). So first
press MENU and then the figure/figures for the
desired menu option.
Equipment
The audio system can be equipped with differ-
ent options and different versions. There are
three audio system versions:
Performance,
High Performance* or
Premuim Sound*
However, FM radio with RDS, AM radio and CD
player are included in all audio systems.
10 Infotainment system
General
10
253
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II
1
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II
distributes the
two stereo audio channels to left, centre, right
and rear speakers. This provides a more real-
istic sound quality than that provided by stand-
ard two-channel stereo.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II
and the Dolby
icon
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II System
is manu-
factured under license from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
1
Premium Sound.
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
254
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Audio controls
VOLUME - Knob
AM/FM – Audio source selection
MODE - Audio source selection, CD, AUX,
USB (e.g. iPod
)
1
and BT*
TUNING - Knob
SOUND - Button
Navigation button - Menus
Volume
Use VOLUME (1) or the steering wheel keypad
to regulate the volume, see page 72. Audio vol-
ume adjusts automatically depending on vehi-
cle speed, see page 257.
Audio source selection
Repeatedly pressing AM/FM switches
between FM1, FM2 and AM.
Repeatedly pressing MODE changes between
CD, USB, AUX and BT.
External audio sources
AUX, USB*
General
AUX input
USB input*
The AUX and USB inputs enable the connec-
tion of an external audio source, e.g. an
iPod
1
or MP3 player.
If you choose to connect an iPod
, MP3 player
or a USB memory stick to the USB connection
then you can control the media via the car's
audio controls.
1
USB only applies for High Performance and Premium Sound. The iPod trademark belongs to Apple Computer Inc.
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
255
Use the MODE button to select the external
audio source you wish to use.
1.
If
USB is selected then Connect device is
shown in the display.
2.
Connect your iPod
, MP3 player or USB
memory stick to the USB connection in the
centre console's storage compartment
(see preceding illustration).
>
The text
Loading appears on the dis-
play when the system loads the file
structure on the storage media. This
takes a while.
When the loading is finished the track informa-
tion is shown on the display and it is possible
to select the track required.
Track selection can take place in the following
three ways:
Select TUNING (4) clockwise or anticlock-
wise.
Use the right or left-hand button (6) of the
navigation control to scroll to the desired
track.
With the steering wheel keypad.
In USB or iPod
mode the infotainment system
operates in an equivalent way to the
CD player for playing back music files. For
more information, see page 264.
NOTE
The system supports the playback of music
files in the MP3, WMA and WAV file formats.
However, there are variants of these file for-
mats that are not supported by the system.
The system also supports most iPod
mod-
els produced in 2005 or later. iPod
Shuffle
is not supported.
USB memory
To facilitate the use of USB memory avoid stor-
ing any files other than music files in the mem-
ory. It takes considerably longer for the system
to load storage media that contains items other
than playable music files.
NOTE
The system supports removable media
which is compatible with USB 2.0 and the
FAT32 file system, and can handle a maxi-
mum of 500 folders and 64 000 files. The
memory must have a capacity of at least 256
Mb.
MP3 player
Many MP3 players have their own file systems
that are not supported by the audio system. For
use in the system, an MP3 player must be set
in
USB Removable device/Mass Storage
Device
mode.
iPod
An iPod
is charged and supplied with power
by the USB connection via the player's con-
nection cable. However, if the player's battery
is completely discharged then it must be
charged before the player is connected.
NOTE
When an iPod
is used as audio source, the
car's infotainment system has a menu
structure that is similar to the iPod
player's
own menu structure.
AUX
Sometimes the AUX external audio source can
be heard at a different volume to the internal
audio sources, e.g. the CD player. If the audio
volume of the external audio source is too high
then the sound quality can be impaired. Pre-
vent this by adjusting the input volume of the
AUX input.
NOTE
The sound quality may be impaired if the
player is charged while the audio system is
in AUX mode, so avoid charging the player.
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
256
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Streaming audio via Bluetooth
*
General
If the car is equipped with Bluetooth
hands-
free* and a mobile phone is connected then the
audio system can wirelessly play back stream-
ing audio files from the mobile phone. Naviga-
tion and control of the sound can be carried out
via the centre console buttons or via the steer-
ing wheel keypad*. In some mobile phones it is
also possible to change tracks from the phone.
To be able to play back the audio a device must
first be paired and connected to the car. For
information about pairing and connection, see
page 278. BT must also be selected as audio
source, see page 254.
NOTE
The Bluetooth
mobile phone must support
the Audio/Video Remote Control Profile
(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile (A2DP). The phone should use
AVRCP version 1.3, A2DP 1.2. Otherwise
some functions may not work.
NOTE
Not all mobile phones available in the mar-
ket are fully compatible with the
Bluetooth
function in the car's audio sys-
tem. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer or visit
www.volvocars.com for information on
compatible phones and external media
players.
Playback
Press the MODE button repeatedly in order to
select BT as audio source.
Audio file selection can take place in the fol-
lowing three ways:
Select TUNING (4) clockwise or anticlock-
wise.
Use the or button (6) of the naviga-
tion control to scroll to the desired audio
file.
With the or buttons on the steering
wheel keypad.
Audio settings
Adjusting audio settings
Press SOUND (5) repeatedly to browse among
the following options. Adjust by turning
TUNING.
BASS - Bass level.
TREBLE - Treble level.
FADER – Balance between the front and
rear speakers.
BALANCE – Balance between the left and
right-hand speakers.
SUBWOOFER* - Bass speaker level. Sub-
woofer must be activated before adjust-
ment is possible, see under the heading
Activating/deactivating the subwoofer
below.
CENTRE
2
- Level for centre speaker.
Three channel stereo or Pro Logic II
must
be activated before adjustment is possible,
see under the heading Activating/deacti-
vating surround sound below.
SURROUND
2
- Level for surround. Pro
Logic II
must be activated before adjust-
ment is possible, see under the heading
Audio settings below.
2
Premium Sound.
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
``
257
Activating/deactivating the subwoofer
Press MENU and then ENTER.
Scroll to Audio settings… and press
ENTER.
Scroll to Subwoofer and press ENTER.
Surround
2
Surround settings govern the spatial
perception of the sound. Settings
and activating/deactivating are sep-
arate for each audio source.
G021216
The Dolby
icon in the display indicates that
Dolby Pro Logic II
is active. There are three
different settings for surround sound:
Dolby Pro Logic II
3 channel
Off - 2 channel stereo.
Activating/deactivating surround sound
1.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
Audio settings… and press
ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Surround FM…, Surround
AM…
, Surround CD…or Surround
AUX…
and press ENTER.
4.
Scroll to
Dolby Pro Logic II
3
, 3 channel
or Off and press ENTER.
Equalizer front/rear
4
The equalizer can be used to adjust different
frequency bands separately.
Adjusting equalizer
1.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
Audio settings… and press
ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Equalizer front… or Equalizer
rear…
and press ENTER.
4. The graphic on the display indicates the
audio level of the frequency in question.
5.
Adjust the level with TUNING (4) or up/
down with the navigation button. Addi-
tional frequencies can be selected using
the left/right navigation button.
6.
Save with ENTER or EXIT to exit without
saving the settings.
Automatic volume control
5
The auto volume control function allows the
audio volume to increase as the speed of the
car increases. There are three levels to choose
from:
Low, Medium and High.
Adjusting automatic volume control
1.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
Audio settings… and press
ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Auto. volume control… and
press ENTER.
4.
Scroll to
Low, Medium or High and press
ENTER.
Optimum sound reproduction
The audio system is calibrated for optimum
sound reproduction by means of digital signal
processing.
This calibration takes into account loudspeak-
ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position etc. for each com-
bination of car model and audio system.
2
Premium Sound.
3
Not available in AM and FM mode.
4
Certain audio systems.
5
Not Performance
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
258
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes
into account the position of the volume control,
radio reception and vehicle speed.
The controls explained in these operating
instructions, e.g. bass, treble and equalizer*
are only intended for the user to be able to
adapt the sound reproduction according to
personal taste.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
``
259
Radio controls
G019806
FM/AM – Wavelength selection
Station presets
TUNING – Knob for station searches
SCAN – Scanning
Navigation button - Tuning and menus
EXIT - Cancel current function
AUTO – Automatic storage of stations
Tuning
Automatic tuning
1.
Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).
2.
Give a brief press on
or .
The radio then automatically searches for the
next strong station.
Manual tuning
1.
Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).
2.
Adjust the frequency by turning TUNING
(3).
Tune into a station with a long press on
or
. Or by using the steering wheel keypad:
Hold in
or on the navigation button
depressed until the desired frequency
appears on the display.
As long as the frequency graphic appears on
the display, searching can be resumed by
briefly pressing
or .
Storing stations
Ten station presets can be stored per wave-
length. FM has two memories for presets:
FM1 and FM2. Preset stations are selected
using the preset buttons (2) or the steering
wheel keypad.
Storing stations manually
1. Tune into a station.
2. Hold a station preset button depressed
until the message
Station stored appears
on the display.
Automatic storage of stations
AUTO (7) seeks out the ten strongest radio sta-
tions and stores them automatically in a sepa-
rate memory. The function is especially useful
in areas where the radio stations and their fre-
quencies are unfamiliar.
Starting automatic storage of stations
1.
Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).
2.
Hold AUTO (7) depressed until
Autostoring appears on the display.
Once
Autostoring disappears from the dis-
play, the stations are stored. The radio contin-
ues in Auto mode and
Auto appears on the
display. The automatically stored presets can
now be selected using the preset buttons (2).
Cancelling automatic storage of stations
Press EXIT (6).
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
260
Selecting an auto-stored preset
Allowing the radio to remain in Auto mode pro-
vides access to the autostored presets.
1.
Briefly press AUTO (7).
>
Auto appears on the display.
2. Press a preset button (2).
> The radio remains in Auto mode until it
is exited by a brief press on AUTO (7),
EXIT (6) or AM/FM (1) cancels Auto
mode.
Storing autostored presets in another
memory
An autostored preset can be transferred to the
FM or AM memory.
1.
Briefly press AUTO (7).
>
Auto appears on the display.
2. Press the preset button for the station you
want to move.
3. Press the button under which the station
will be stored and hold it depressed until
the message
Station stored appears on
the display.
> The radio exits Auto mode and the
stored station can be selected as a pre-
set.
Scanning
SCAN (4) automatically searches through a
wavelength for strong stations. When a station
is found, it is played for approx. 8 seconds
before scanning is resumed.
Activating/deactivating Scan
1.
Select wavelength using AM/FM.
2.
Press SCAN to activate.
>
SCAN appears on the display. Close
using SCAN or EXIT.
Storing a station
A selected station can be stored as a preset
while
SCAN is active.
Press a station preset button and hold it
depressed until the message
Station
stored
appears on the display.
> Scanning is interrupted and the stored
station can be selected as a preset.
RDS functions
1
Radio Data System - RDS links FM transmitters
into a network. An FM transmitter in such a
network sends information that gives an
RDS radio the following functions:
Automatically switches to a stronger trans-
mitter if reception in the area is poor.
Searches for programme form, such as
traffic information or news.
Receives text information on current radio
programme.
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only
some if its functionality.
Programme functions
In FM mode, the radio can search for stations
with certain programme types. If a required
programme type is located the radio can
switch stations interrupting the audio source
currently in use. For example, if the CD player
is in use, it is paused. The interrupting trans-
mission is played at a preset audio volume, see
page 263. The radio returns to the previous
audio source and audio volume when the set
programme type is no longer broadcast.
The programme functions alarm (
ALARM!),
traffic information (
TP), news (News), and pro-
1
The RDS functions available vary in the different markets.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
``
261
gramme types (PTY) interrupt one another in
order of priority, where alarm has the highest
priority and programme types has the lowest.
If you want to return to the interrupted audio
source before the message or programme type
has been completed, press EXIT.
For further programme interruption settings,
see EON and REG see page 262. The pro-
gramme functions are modified via the menu
system, see page 252.
Alarm
This function is used to warn of serious acci-
dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be
temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The
message
ALARM! appears on the display
when an alarm message is transmitted.
Traffic information – TP
This function allows traffic informa-
tion broadcast within a set station's
RDS network to break through.
TP
shows that the function has been
activated. If the set station can send traffic
information then
appears on the display.
G021220
Activating/deactivating TP
1.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
TP and press ENTER.
TP from current station/all stations
The radio can interrupt with traffic information
from only the set (current) station or from all
stations.
1. Select an FM station.
2.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
4.
Scroll to
TP and press ENTER.
5.
Scroll to
TP station… and press ENTER.
>
Either
TP from current station or TP
from all stations
is shown on the dis-
play.
6.
Press ENTER.
Activating/deactivating TP search
TP search is useful during long journeys while
an audio source other than the radio is being
played. The function automatically searches
for traffic information within different
RDS networks.
1.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
TP and press ENTER.
4.
Scroll to
TP search and press ENTER.
News
This function allows news broad-
casts within a set station's
RDS network to break through. The
message
News shows that the func-
tion is active.
G021221
Activating/deactivating News
1.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
News and press ENTER.
News from current station/all stations
The radio can interrupt with news from only the
set (current) station or from all stations.
1. Select an FM station.
2.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
4.
Scroll to
News station… and press
ENTER.
>
Either
News from current station or
News from all stations is shown on the
display.
5.
Press ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
262
Programme types – PTY
The PTY function can be used to
select different programme types,
such as
Pop music and Serious
classic
. The PTY symbol indicates
that the function is active. This function allows
programme types broadcast within a set sta-
tion's RDS network to break through.
G021222
Activating/deactivating PTY
1.
Select
FM1 or FM2 with FM/AM.
2.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
PTY and press ENTER.
4.
Scroll to
Select PTY… and press
ENTER.
> A list of programme types appears:
Current affairs, Information etc. The
PTY function is activated by selecting
programme types and deactivated by
clearing all PTYs.
5. Select the desired programme types or
Clear all PTY…
Search PTY
This function searches the entire wavelength
for the selected programme type.
1. Activate PTY.
2.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
PTY and press ENTER.
4.
Scroll to
Search PTY and press ENTER.
If the radio finds any of the selected pro-
gramme types,
>| To seek appears on the dis-
play. Press the navigation button
to con-
tinue searching for another broadcast of the
selected programme types.
Display of programme type
The programme type of the current station can
be shown on the display.
NOTE
Not all radio stations support this function.
Activating/deactivating display
1.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
PTY and press ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Show PTY and press ENTER.
Radio text
Some RDS stations transmit information on
programme content, artists, etc. This informa-
tion can be shown on the display.
Activating/deactivating radio text
1.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
Radio text and press ENTER.
Automatic frequency update – AF
The AF function selects one of the strongest
transmitters for a set station. The radio may
sometimes need to search through the entire
FM wavelength to find a strong transmitter. If
this occurs, the radio mutes and
PI seekEXIT
to cancel
appears in the display.
Activating/deactivating AF
1.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
AF and press ENTER.
Regional radio programmes – REG
This function causes the radio to con-
tinue with a regional transmitter even
if its signal strength is low.
Regional indicates that the function
is active. The regional function is normally
deactivated.
G021223
Activating/deactivating REG
1.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Regional and press ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
263
Enhanced Other Networks – EON
The EON function is especially useful in urban
areas with many regional radio stations. It
allows the distance between the car and the
radio station transmitter to determine when
programme functions should interrupt the cur-
rent audio source.
Local – interrupts only if the radio station
transmitter is close.
Distant – interrupts if the station transmit-
ter is far away, even if there is a lot of static.
Off – no interruption for programmes from
other transmitters.
Activating/deactivating EON
1.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
EON… and press ENTER.
4.
Scroll to
Local, Distant or Off and press
ENTER.
Resetting RDS functions
Resets all radio settings to the original factory
settings.
1.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Reset all… and press ENTER.
Volume control, programme types
The interrupting programme types are heard at
the volume selected for each programme type.
If the volume level is adjusted during the pro-
gramme interruption, the new level is saved
until the next programme interruption.
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
10
264
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
CD function controls
G019807
Navigation button – Fast forward/rewind,
track selection and menus
CD changer position selection*
CD insertion/eject
CD insertion/eject slot
MODE - Selection of audio source (CD,
AUX, USB*)
TUNING - Knob for track selection
Starting playback (CD player)
If a music CD is in the player when the audio
system is in CD mode then playback is started
automatically. Otherwise, load a disc and
change to CD mode by pressing MODE.
Start playback (CD changer*)
If a CD position with a music CD is already
selected when the audio system is activated
then playback starts automatically. Otherwise
change to CD changer mode using MODE and
select a disc with the number buttons 1–6 or
Up/Down on the navigation button.
Insert a CD
1.
Select an empty position with buttons 1–
6 or Up/Down on the navigation button.
> An empty position is marked on the dis-
play. The text
Insert disc shows that a
new disc can be inserted. The
CD changer can hold up to 6 CD discs.
2. Inserting a CD in the CD changer.
CD eject
A CD will stay in the ejected position for
approx. 12 seconds. Following which it is re-
inserted in the player and playback continues.
Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but-
ton (3).
Eject all discs with a long press on the eject
button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by
disc. The message
EJECT ALL is shown in the
display.
Pause
If the volume is turned down completely, the
CD player is stopped. The player is restarted
when volume is increased.
Audio files*
The CD player/CD changer* also supports MP3
and WMA format audio files.
NOTE
Certain types of copy-protected audio files
cannot be read by the player.
When a CD containing audio files is inserted
into the player the disc's folder structure is loa-
ded in. It may take a while before playback
starts due to the quality of the disc.
Navigation and playback
If a disc with audio files is inserted in the
CD player then the disc's folder structure is
shown by pressing ENTER. The folder struc-
ture is navigated in the same way as the audio
system's menu structure. Audio files have the
symbol
and folders have the symbol .
Start audio file playback with ENTER.
When the playback of a file is finished the play-
back of the other files in the same folder con-
tinues. Folder change takes place automati-
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
10
265
cally when all files in the current folder have
been played back.
Press left/right on the navigation button if the
display is not wide enough to show the whole
audio file name.
Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio
files
Short presses right/left on the navigation but-
ton are used to scroll between
CD tracks/audio files. Long presses are used
to fast-wind CD tracks/audio files. TUNING (or
the steering wheel keypad) can also be used
for this purpose.
Scan CD
This function plays the first 10 seconds of each
CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to activate.
Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue play-
back of the current CD track/audio file.
Random
This function plays the tracks in random order.
The random CD tracks/audio files can be scrol-
led through in the normal way.
NOTE
It is only possible to scroll between random
CD tracks
1
on the current disc.
Different messages appear on the display
depending on which random function has been
selected:
RANDOM means that the tracks from only
one music CD are played
RND ALL means that all tracks on all
music CDs in the CD changer are played.
RND FLD means that the audio files in a
folder on the current CD are played.
Activating/deactivating, random (CD
player)
If a normal music CD is being played:
1.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
Random and press ENTER.
If a disc with audio files is being played:
1.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
Random and press ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Folder or Disc and press
ENTER.
Activating/deactivating, random (CD
changer)
If a normal music CD is being played:
1.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
Random and press ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Single disc or All discs and press
ENTER.
The option
All discs only applies to the music
CDs in the changer.
If a CD with audio files is being played:
1.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
Random and press ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Single disc or Folder and press
ENTER.
The function is deactivated when another CD
is selected.
Disc text
If title information is stored on a music CD then
it can be shown on the display
2
.
Activate/deactivate
1. Start CD playback.
2.
Press MENU and then ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Disc text and press ENTER.
1
Applies to the CD changer.
2
Applies to CD changer.
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
10
266
CDs
Using low quality CD discs could result in poor
or non-existent sound.
IMPORTANT
Only use standard discs (12 cm in diameter).
Do not use CD discs with adhesive disc
labels. The heat in the CD player may cause
the label to come off, damaging the
CD player.
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – audio system
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
267
Overview
FM MENU
1
1. News
2. TP
3. PTY…
4. Radio text
5. Advanced radio settings…
6.* Audio settings…
AM MENU
1.* Audio settings…
CD MENU
For CD player with CD disc.
1. Random
2. News
3. TP
4. Disc text
5.* Audio settings…
CD MENU
For CD player with MP3 disc.
1. Playlist
2. Random…
3. News
4. TP
5. Disc text
6.* Audio settings…
CD MENU
For CD changer* with CD disc
selected.
1. Random…
2. News
3. TP
4. Disc text
5.* Audio settings…
CD MENU
For CD changer* with MP3 disc
selected.
1. Playlist
2. Random…
3. News
4. TP
5. Disc text
6.* Audio settings…
AUX MENU
1. AUX input volume…
2. News
3. TP
4.* Audio settings…
USB MENU*
1. Playlist
2. Random…
3. News
4. TP
5. Track information
6. Audio settings…
1
The RDS functions available vary in the different markets.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
268
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Phone system components.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
269
Phone system components
Antenna
1
Steering wheel keypad. Most phone sys-
tem functions can be accessed via the key-
pad. see page 270.
Microphone. The microphone for hands-
free is fitted in the roof by the sun visor.
Centre console control panel. All phone
functions (except call volume) can be regu-
lated via the control panel.
SIM card reader
General
Always put traffic safety first.
Switch off the phone system when refuel-
ling the car.
Switch off the system near blasting work.
Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop carries out phone system
servicing.
Emergency calls
Emergency calls to alarm centres can be made
without a SIM card as long as there is coverage
by a network operator.
Making an emergency call
1. Activate the phone.
2. Ring the emergency number that applies to
your region (within EU: 112).
3.
Press ENTER.
IDIS
With the IDIS system (Intelligent Driver
Information System), incoming phone calls and
SMS messages can be delayed so that con-
centration can be focused on driving when IDIS
determines that the traffic situation requires a
high level of attention.
Incoming calls and SMS messages can be
delayed 5 seconds before they are diverted. If
the current traffic situation still requires a high
level of attention from the driver then the
incoming call is diverted to the voice mail.
Missed calls are shown in the display.
IDIS be disconnected using menu function 6.5,
see page 275.
SIM card
G020244
The phone can only be used with a valid SIM
card Subscriber Identity Module. Cards are
available from various network operators. Con-
tact your network operator if you experience
difficulties with the SIM card.
NOTE
The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIM
cards (3G only). Combined 3G/GSM cards
work. Contact your network operator if a
replacement SIM card is required.
1
Available only for built-in phone or RTI.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
270
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Extra SIM card
Many network operators offer two SIM cards
for the same phone number. The extra SIM
card can be used in the car.
Inserting the SIM card
1. Switch off the phone and open the glove-
box.
2. Pull out the SIM card holder from the SIM
card reader, see illustration on page 269.
3. Position the SIM card in the holder with the
metal surface visible. The bevelled edge of
the SIM card should align with the bevel of
the SIM card holder.
4. Carefully press in the SIM card holder.
Menus
Page 275 describes how to control phone
functions with the menu system.
Traffic safety
For safety reasons, parts of the phone menu
system cannot be accessed at speeds in
excess of 8 km/h.
Phone controls
G019809
Centre console control panel.
VOLUME - Control the background vol-
ume from the radio, for example, during a
call
Number and letter buttons
MENU - Opens the main menu
EXIT - End/refuse calls, clear entered char-
acters
Navigation button – Scroll in menus and
character rows
ENTER – Accept calls. A press of the but-
ton reveals latest dialled numbers
PHONE - On/off and standby mode
Steering wheel keypad
G020243
When the phone is active, the steering wheel
keypad is locked to phone functions. To con-
trol the audio system, the phone must be in
standby mode (standby).
ENTER – Accept calls. A press of the but-
ton reveals latest dialled numbers.
EXIT - End/refuse calls, clear entered char-
acters. Changes between the audio menu
and the phone menu.
Call volume – Increase/decrease
Navigation buttons – Scroll in menus
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
271
On/Off
A handset appears in the display when the
phone system is active or in standby mode
(standby). If the remote control key is turned to
position 0 when the phone is in one of these
modes, the phone automatically resumes this
mode the next time the remote control key is
turned to position I or II.
Activating the phone system
Phone system functions can only be used
when the phone is in active mode.
1.
Press PHONE.
2. Enter the PIN code (if necessary) and press
ENTER.
Deactivating the phone system
No calls can be received when the phone sys-
tem is deactivated.
Hold PHONE depressed until the phone is
deactivated.
Standby mode (standby)
In standby mode, the audio system can be in
use while calls are received. However, it is not
possible to make calls when in standby mode.
Putting the phone in standby mode
The phone must first be in active mode before
it can be put in standby mode.
Press PHONE.
Activating from standby mode
Press PHONE.
Making and receiving calls
To call
1. Activate the phone system (if necessary).
2. Dial the number or use the phone book,
see page 273.
3.
Press ENTER.
Receiving a call
For Auto answer, see menu option 4.3, see
page 275.
Press ENTER.
Ending a call
Press EXIT.
Refusing a call
Press EXIT.
Call waiting
A two-tone signal during a phone call indicates
that there is another incoming call.
Answer? is
shown in the display. The call can be refused
or taken in the normal manner. If the incoming
call is taken, the previous call is put on hold.
Putting a call on hold/resuming a call
1.
Press MENU or ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
Hold or Resume and press
ENTER.
Dialling a third party
1. Put the call on hold.
2. Dial the number of the third party.
Switching between calls
1.
Press MENU or ENTER.
2.
Scroll to
Swap and press ENTER.
Starting a conference call
A conference call consists of three parties that
can talk to one another. Once a conference call
has been initiated, no more parties can be con-
nected. All calls are ended when a conference
call is ended.
1. Start two phone calls.
2.
Press MENU or ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Join and press ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
272
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Volume
The phone uses the driver's door speaker.
Call volume
Call volume is regulated with
the steering wheel keypad.
Audio system volume
Audio system volume is temporarily lowered
during a phone call. Once the call is ended the
previous volume is resumed. If the volume is
regulated during the call, the new level is
retained once the call is ended. Sound can also
be automatically muted during a phone call,
see menu 6.4.3, on page 275. This function
only applies to the Volvo integrated phone sys-
tem.
Entering text
Text is entered using the phone keypad.
1. Press the key with the desired character -
once for the first character on the button,
twice for the second, etc. See table.
2.
Press 1 for a space. If two characters in a
row are to be entered using the same but-
ton, press * or wait a few seconds.
A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-
acter. A long press on EXIT will clear all entered
characters.
Key Function
space 1 - ? ! , . : " ' ( )
a b c 2 ä å à æ ç
d e f 3 è é
g h i 4 ì
j k l 5
m n o 6 ñ ö ò Ø
p q r s 7 ß
t u v 8 ü ù
w x y z 9
Pressed briefly if two char-
acters shall be entered after
each other with the same
key.
Key Function
+ 0 @ * # & $ £ / %
Switch between upper and
lower case.
Handling numbers
Calling the last number dialled
The phone automatically stores the last phone
numbers dialled.
1.
Press ENTER.
2.
Scroll to a number and press ENTER.
Phonebook
If the phone book contains a live caller's con-
tact information then this is shown in the dis-
play. Contact information can be stored on the
SIM card and in the phone.
Storing contacts in the phone book
1.
Press MENU.
2.
Scroll to
Phone book… and press
ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
New contact and press ENTER.
4.
Enter a name and press ENTER.
5.
Enter a number and press ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
273
6.
Scroll to
SIM card or Phone memory and
press ENTER.
Searching for contacts in the phone book
Use the down arrow of the navigation button
instead of MENU for direct access to the
Search menu.
1.
Press MENU.
2.
Scroll to
Phone book… and press
ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Search and press ENTER.
4. Enter the first few letters of the item and
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
5.
Scroll to an item and press ENTER.
Copying entries between the SIM card
and Phone book
1.
Press MENU.
2.
Scroll to
Phone book… and press
ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Copy all… and press ENTER.
4.
Scroll to
SIM to phone or Phone to SIM
and press ENTER.
Deleting contacts from the phone book
1.
Press MENU.
2.
Scroll to
Phone book… and press
ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Search and press ENTER.
4. Enter the first few letters of the item and
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
5. Scroll to the item to be erased and press
ENTER.
6.
Scroll to
Erase and press ENTER.
Erase all contacts
1.
Press MENU.
2.
Scroll to
Phone book… and press
ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Erase SIM or Erase phone and
press ENTER.
If required, enter phone code. The factory-set
default code is 1234.
Speed dial
A keypad button (19) can be used as a speed
dial number for a contact in the phone book.
1.
Press MENU.
2.
Scroll to
Phone book… and press
ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Speed dial… and press ENTER.
4.
Scroll to
Select numbers and press
ENTER.
5. Scroll to the digit of the keypad button for
the speed dial number and press ENTER.
6. Enter the first few letters of the item and
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
7.
Scroll to an item and press ENTER.
8.
Hold EXIT depressed to leave the menu
system.
Calling using speed dial
Briefly press the required keypad button,
followed by ENTER.
NOTE
It takes a short time before speed dialling
becomes available after the phone has been
activated.
To use the speed dial function Speed dial…
must be activated in the Phone book… menu,
see page 277.
Calling from the phone book
1.
Press MENU.
2.
Scroll to
Phone book… and press
ENTER.
> All contacts in the phone book memory
are displayed. The number of contacts
displayed can be reduced by entering
part of the contact's name.
3.
Scroll to a contact and press ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
274
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Press ENTER to dial.
NOTE
Hold in the required letter/button in the key-
pad for about 2 seconds to reach the cor-
responding letter in the phone book.
Functions during a call
Several functions are available during a call.
Some functions can only be used when a call
is on hold.
Press MENU or ENTER during a call to access
the In-call menu and scroll to one of the fol-
lowing alternatives:
1.
Mute microphone/Microphone on
Mute mode.
2.
Hold/Resume - Put a call on hold or
resume a call.
3.
Phone book – Show phone book.
4.
Join – Conference calling (available if more
than two parties are connected)
5.
Swap – Switch between two calls (availa-
ble if up to three parties are connected).
SMS - Short Message Service
Reading SMS
1.
Press MENU.
2.
Scroll to
Messages… and press ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Read and press ENTER.
4.
Scroll to a message and press ENTER.
> The message text is shown in the dis-
play. Additional selections can be made
by pressing ENTER. Hold EXIT
depressed to leave the menu system.
Writing and sending
1.
Press MENU.
2.
Scroll to
Messages… and press ENTER.
3.
Scroll to
Write new and press ENTER.
4.
Enter text and press ENTER.
5.
Scroll to
Send and press ENTER.
6.
Enter a phone number and press ENTER.
IMEI number
To block the phone, you must provide your
network operator with the phone's IMEI num-
ber. This is a 15 digit serial number that is pro-
grammed into the phone. Dial *#06# to show
this number in the display. Write it down and
keep it in a safe place.
Specifications
Output 2 W
SIM card Small
Memory entries
250
A
SMS (Short Message Serv-
ice)
Yes
Data/Fax No
Dualband (900/1800 MHz) Yes
A
In the phone, plus the number of memory spaces that are
available on the SIM card.
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – phone*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
275
Phone menu
1. Call register…
1.1. Last 10 missed calls
1.2. Last 10 received calls
1.3. Last 10 dialled calls
1.4. Erase list…
1.4.1. All calls
1.4.2. Missed calls
1.4.3. Received calls
1.4.4. Dialled numbers
1.5. Call duration…
1.5.1. Last call
1.5.2. Call count
1.5.3. Total time
1.5.4. Reset timers
2. Phone book…
2.1. Search
2.2. New contact
2.3. Copy all…
2.3.1. SIM to phone
2.3.2. Phone to SIM
2.4. Speed dial…
2.4.1. Active
2.4.2. Select numbers
2.5. Erase SIM
2.6. Erase phone
2.7. Memory status
3. Messages…
3.1. Read
3.2. Write new
3.3. Message settings…
3.3.1. SMSC number
3.3.2. Validity time…
3.3.3. Message type…
4 Call options…
4.1. Send my number
4.2. Call waiting
4.3. Automatic answer
4.4. Auto re-dial
4.5. Voice mail number
4.6. Diversions…
4.6.1. All calls
4.6.2. When busy
4.6.3. Not answered
4.6.4. Not reachable
4.6.5. Fax calls
4.6.6. Data calls
4.6.7. Cancel all
5. Change phone
5.1. Carphone
5.2. Add phone
5.3–7.
Added phones
1
NOTE
The menu above only applies to cars with
Bluetooth
TM
handsfree.
6. Phone settings…
6.1. Network selection…
6.1.1. Automatic
6.1.2. Manual select
6.2. SIM security…
6.2.1. On
6.2.2. Off
1
A maximum of 5 phones.
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – phone*
10
276
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
6.2.3. Automatic
6.3. Edit PIN code
6.4. Sounds and volume…
6.4.1. Ring volume
6.4.2. Ring signals…
6.4.3. Mute radio
6.4.4. Message beep
6.5. IDIS
6.6. Reset phone settings
Description of menu options
1. Call register
1.1. Last 10 missed
List of missed calls. You can choose to call,
erase or store the number in the phone book.
1.2. Last 10 received
List of received calls. You can choose to call,
erase or store the number in the phone book.
1.3. Last 10 dialled
List of dialled numbers. You can choose to call,
erase or store the number in the phone book.
1.4. Erase list
Erase the lists found in the menus 1.1, 1.2 and
1.3 as below.
1.4.1. All calls
1.4.2. Missed calls
1.4.3. Received calls
1.4.4. Dialled numbers
1.5. Call duration
Duration of all calls or of the most recent call.
To reset the call timer, see menu 1.5.4.
1.5.1. Last call
1.5.2. Call count
1.5.3. Total time
1.5.4. Reset timers
2. Phone book
2.1. Search
Search for a name in the phone book.
2.2. New contact
Store names and phone numbers in the phone
book, see page 272.
2.3. Copy all
Copy phone numbers and names from the SIM
card to the phone memory.
2.3.1. SIM to phone
2.3.2. Phone to SIM
2.4. Speed dial
A number stored in the phone book can be
stored as a speed dial number.
2.4.1 Active
2.4.2 Select numbers
2.5. Erase SIM
Erase the entire SIM card memory.
2.6. Erase phone
Erase the entire phone memory.
2.7. Memory status
Shows how many positions are occupied in the
SIM card and phone memory. The table shows
how many of the total number of positions are
occupied, e.g. 100 (250).
3. Messages
3.1. Read
Received text messages. Select whether to
erase, forward, change or save the entire mes-
sage or parts of it.
3.2. Write new
Write a message using the keypad. Choose
whether to save or send it.
3.3. Message settings
Enter the number (SMSC number) of the mes-
sage centre to which messages are to be trans-
ferred as well as how long they are to be saved
at the message centre. Contact your network
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – phone*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
277
operator for information on message settings.
Normally, these settings should not be altered.
3.3.1. SMSC number
3.3.2. Validity time…
3.3.3. Message type…
4. Call settings
4.1. Send my number
Displays or hides your phone number to/from
the person you call. Contact your network
operator regarding ex-directory numbers.
4.2. Call waiting
Be alerted during a phone call that there is
another incoming call.
4.3. Auto answer
Automatically answers incoming calls.
4.4. Auto redial
Automatically calls a previously engaged num-
ber.
4.5. Voice mail number
Stores voice mail number.
4.6. Call divert
Choose when and what type of calls are to be
diverted to a specified phone number.
4.6.1. All calls
This setting only applies during the call in pro-
gress.
4.6.2 When busy
4.6.3. Not answered
4.6.4. Not reachable
4.6.5. Fax calls
4.6.6. Data calls
4.6.7. Cancel all
5. Change phone
5.1. Car phone
Select the built-in phone.
5.2. Add phone
Add mobile phones to the list Added phones.
5.3-7. Added phones
Select to connect to one of the added phones
(up to 5 phones).
NOTE
The menu above only applies to cars with
Bluetooth
TM
handsfree.
6. Phone settings
6.1. Selecting network
Choose a network automatically or manually.
The selected network is shown in the display in
the phone's basic mode.
6.1.1. Automatic
6.1.2. Manual select
6.2. SIM security
Select if the PIN code should be on, off or if the
phone should automatically give the PIN code.
6.2.1. On
6.2.2. Off
6.2.3. Automatic
6.3. Edit PIN code
Change PIN code. Write down and save the
code in a safe place.
6.4. Sounds and volume
6.4.1. Ring volume
Adjust the ring tone volume.
6.4.2. Ring signals…
There are seven different ring tones.
6.4.3. Mute radio
The radio can be switched off/on.
6.4.4. Message beep
6.5. IDIS
If the IDIS function is deactivated, incoming
calls are not delayed, regardless of the driving
situation.
6.6. Reset phone settings
Reset the system's factory settings.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
278
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
System overview.
Mobile phone
Microphone
Centre console
Bluetooth
TM
A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth
TM
can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys-
tem. The audio system then works handsfree,
with the option to control a range of the mobile
phone's functions remotely. The microphone is
fitted in the roof console (2). The mobile phone
can always be operated by its own keys irre-
spective of whether or not it is connected.
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully
compatible with the handsfree function.
Volvo recommends that you seek assis-
tance from an authorised Volvo dealer or
visit www.volvocars.com for information on
compatible phones.
Menus and controls
The menus are navigated using the control
panel in the centre console (3), see page 270.
Remember
The menus are controlled from the centre con-
sole and the steering wheel keypad. For gen-
eral information on menus, see page 275.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with both
Bluetooth
TM
handsfree and built-in phone
then there is an additional menu in the
phone menu, see page 275.
Activate/deactivate
A short press on PHONE activates the hands-
free function. The text
PHONE at the top of the
display shows that it is in phone mode. The
symbol
shows that the handsfree func-
tion is active.
One long press on PHONE deactivates the
handsfree function and disconnects a con-
nected phone.
Connect mobile phone
A mobile phone is connected in different ways
depending on whether or not it has been con-
nected previously. To connect a mobile phone
for the first time, follow the instructions below:
Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system
1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible
via Bluetooth
TM
, see the mobile phone's
manual or www.volvocars.com.
2. Activate the handsfree function with
PHONE.
>
Menu option
Add phone appears on
the display. If one or more mobile
phones have already been registered
then these are also shown.
3.
Select
Add phone.
> The audio system searches for mobile
phones in the vicinity. The search takes
approximately 30 seconds. The mobile
phones detected are specified with their
respective Bluetooth
TM
name in the dis-
play. The handsfree function's
Bluetooth
TM
name is shown in the
mobile phone as
My Volvo Car.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
279
4. Choose one of the mobile phones in the
audio system display.
5. Enter the number series shown in the audio
system display via the mobile phone key-
pad.
Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system
1. Activate the handsfree function with
PHONE. If there is a phone connected,
disconnect the connected phone.
2.
Search with the phone's Bluetooth
TM
, see
the mobile phone's manual.
3.
Select
My Volvo Car in the list of units
detected in your mobile phone.
4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobile
phone when prompted for the PIN code.
5.
Select to connect to
My Volvo Car from
the mobile phone.
The mobile phone is registered and connected
automatically to the audio system while the text
Synchronising is shown in the display. For
more information on how mobile phones are
registered, see page 280.
When the connection is established the symbol
is shown and the mobile phone's
Bluetooth
TM
name is shown in the display. Now
the mobile phone can be controlled from the
audio system.
To call
1.
Make sure that the text
PHONE is shown
at the top of the display and that the
symbol is visible.
2. Dial the number or use the phone book,
see page 281.
3.
Press ENTER.
The call is interrupted with EXIT.
Disconnecting the mobile phone
Automatic disconnection takes place if the
mobile phone moves out of the audio system's
range. For more information on connection,
see page 280.
Manual disconnection takes place by deacti-
vating the handsfree function with one long
press on PHONE. The handsfree function is
also deactivated when the engine is switched
off or when a door is opened
1
.
When the mobile phone has been discon-
nected an ongoing call can be continued with
the mobile phone's built-in microphone and
speaker.
NOTE
Some mobile phones require that the
changeover from handsfree is confirmed
from the phone's keypad.
Making and receiving calls
Incoming call
Calls are accepted with ENTER even if the
audio system is in CD or FM mode for example.
Refuse or end with EXIT.
Auto answer
The automatic answer function means that
calls are accepted automatically. Activate/
deactivate under Phone Menu…
Call
options…
Automatic answer.
In-call menu
Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing call
to access the following functions:
Mute microphone - audio system micro-
phone is muted.
Transfer call to mobile - the call is trans-
ferred to the mobile phone.
1
Applies to Keyless Drive.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
280
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
With certain mobile phones the connection
is terminated when the privacy function is
used. This is normal. The handsfree function
asks if you want to reconnect.
Phone book – searching in the phone
book.
NOTE
A new call cannot be started during an
ongoing call.
Audio settings
Call volume
Call volume can be adjusted during calls. Use
the steering wheel keypad.
Audio system volume
In phone mode (PHONE) the audio system vol-
ume can be adjusted as usual with VOLUME.
The audio source can be automatically muted
for incoming calls under Phone Menu…
Phone settings… Sounds and volume…
Mute radio.
Ring volume
Go to Phone Menu… Phone settings…
Sounds and volume… Ring volume
and adjust with
/ on the navigation but-
ton.
Ring signals
The handsfree function has integrated ring sig-
nals that can be selected under Phone
Menu…
Phone settings… Sounds and
volume…
Ring signals… Ring signal 1
etc.
NOTE
The connected mobile phone's ring signal is
not deactivated when one of the handsfree
system's integrated signals is used.
In order to select the connected phone's ring
signal
2
, go to Phone Menu… Phone
settings…
Sounds and volume… Ring
signals…
Use mobile phone signal.
More on registering and connecting
A maximum of three mobile phones can be
registered. Registration is performed once per
phone. After registration the mobile phone is in
the list of added phones. Not more than one
mobile phone can be connected at a time.
Phones can be deregistered under Phone
Menu…
Bluetooth… Remove phone.
Automatic connection
When the handsfree function is active and the
last mobile phone connected is in range it is
connected automatically. When the audio sys-
tem searches for the last phone connected its
name is shown in the display. To change over
to manual connection of another phone, press
EXIT.
Manual connection
If you want to connect a mobile phone other
than the last connected or change the con-
nected mobile phone, proceed as follows:
Set the audio system in phone mode
(
PHONE) and follow the instructions on the
display or change the connected mobile phone
by using the menu system as described below.
The menu structure is available in two variants
depending on whether the car only has
2
Not supported by all mobile phones.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
281
Bluetooth
TM
or if the car also has a built-in
phone.
For cars with only Bluetooth
TM
the connec-
tion is made under Phone Menu…
Bluetooth… Change phone Add
phone or select one of the previously con-
nected phones.
For cars with built-in phone and
Bluetooth
TM
the connection is made under
Phone Menu… Change phone Add
phone or select one of the previously con-
nected phones.
Phonebook
All use of the phone book presupposes that the
text
PHONE is shown at the top of the display
and that the
symbol is visible.
The audio system stores a copy of the phone
book from each registered mobile phone. The
phone book is copied automatically to the
audio system during each connection. Deacti-
vate the function under Phone settings…
Synchronise phone book. Searching for con-
tacts is only performed in the connected
mobile phone's phone book.
NOTE
If the mobile phone does not support copy-
ing of the phone book then
List is empty is
shown when copying is finished.
If the phone book contains a ringing caller's
contact information then this is shown in the
display.
Searching for contacts
The easiest way to search in the phone book is
with long presses on the keys 2–9. This starts
a search in the phone book based on the key's
first letter.
The phone book can also be reached with
/
on the navigation button or with / on
the steering wheel keypad. The search can also
be performed from the phone book's Search
menu under Phone book…
Search:
1. Enter the first few letters of the contact and
press ENTER. Or simply press ENTER.
2.
Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to
call.
Voice recognition
The mobile phone's voice recognition function
for dialling can be used by holding in ENTER.
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully
compatible with the voice recognition func-
tion. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer or visit
www.volvocars.com for information on
compatible phones.
Voice mail number
The number to the voice mail is changed under
Call options…
Voice mail number. If no
number is stored then this menu is reached
with one long press on 1. Press 1 for a long time
to use the stored number.
Call lists
The call lists are copied to the handsfree func-
tion at each new connection and are then
updated during the connection. Press ENTER
to show the last dialled. Other call lists are
available under
Call register….
NOTE
Certain mobile phones show a list of the last
dialled numbers in reverse order.
Inputting text
Input text using the keypad in the centre con-
sole. Press once for the key's first character,
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
282
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
twice for the second etc. Continue pressing for
more characters, see the table on page 272.
A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-
acter. One long press on EXIT clears all input
characters.
/ on the navigation button
scrolls between the characters.
Menu structure - Bluetooth
TM
handsfree
NOTE
The menu for Bluetooth
TM
handsfree is
available in two variants. For cars with only
Bluetooth
TM
handsfree and for cars with
built-in phone and Bluetooth
TM
handsfree.
1. Call register…
1.1. Last 10 missed calls
1.2. Last 10 received calls
1.3. Last 10 dialled calls
2. Phone book…
2.1. Search
2.2. Copy fr. mobile phone
3. Bluetooth…
3.1. Change phone
3.1.1. Add phone
3.1.2–6.
Added phones
3
3.2. Remove phone
3.3. Connect fr. mobile phone
3.4. Car Bluetooth info
4. Call options…
4.1. Automatic answer
4.2. Voice mail number
5. Phone settings…
5.1. Sounds and volume…
5.1.1. Ring volume
5.1.2. Ring signals…
5.1.3. Mute radio
5.2. Synchronise phone book
Menu structure - Bluetooth
TM
handsfree with built-in phone
1. Call register…
1.1. Last 10 missed calls
1.2. Last 10 received calls
1.3. Last 10 dialled calls
2. Phone book…
2.1. Search
2.2. Copy fr. mobile phone
3. Bluetooth…
3.1. Remove phone
3.2. Connect fr. mobile phone
3.3. Car Bluetooth info
4. Call options…
4.1. Automatic answer
4.2. Voice mail number
5. Change phone
5.1. Carphone
5.2. Add phone
5.3–7.
Added phones
3
3
A maximum of 5 phones.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
283
6. Phone settings…
6.1. Sounds and volume…
6.1.1. Ring volume
6.1.2. Ring signals…
6.1.3. Mute radio
6.2. Synchronise phone book
284
Type designation................................................................................... 286
Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 288
Engine specifications............................................................................ 291
Engine oil............................................................................................... 292
Fluids and lubricants............................................................................. 294
Fuel....................................................................................................... 297
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ......................................... 299
Electrical system................................................................................... 301
Type approval....................................................................................... 303
Symbols in the display.......................................................................... 304
SPECIFICATIONS
11 Specifications
Type designation
11
286
11 Specifications
Type designation
11
287
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle
identification and engine numbers can facili-
tate all contact with a Volvo dealer regarding
the car and when ordering spare parts and
accessories.
Type designation, vehicle identification
number, maximum permissible weights,
codes for colour and upholstery and type
approval number.
S40 and V50: The label is visible when the
right rear door is opened. C30 and C70:
The label is visible when the right door is
opened.
Label for parking heater.
Engine code, component and serial num-
bers.
Label for engine oil.
Gearbox type designation and serial num-
ber:
manual gearbox
, automatic gearbox
The car's identification number (VIN –
Vehicle Identification Number).
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual are
not provided as exact reproductions of
those in the car. The purpose is to show
their approximate appearance and location
in the car. The information that applies to
your car in particular is available on the label
in question in your car.
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
11
288
Dimensions
Dimensions mm
A Wheelbase 2640
B Length 4522
C Load length, floor,
folded seat
1766
D Load length, floor 989
E Load height 685
F Height 1457
Dimensions mm
G Front track
1548
A
1535
B
H Rear track
1544
A
1531
B
I Load width, floor 1002
J Width
1770 (1785
C
)
Dimensions mm
K Width including door
mirrors
2022
L Width including folded-
in door mirrors
1845
A
with 15" wheel
B
with 16" and 17" wheels
C
with Keyless drive*
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
11
289
Weights
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories,
and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see
table) influences the payload and is not
included in the kerb weight.
Permitted maximum load = Gross vehicle
weight - Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to
cars in the standard version - i.e. a car with-
out extra equipment or accessories. This
means that for every accessory added the
loading capacity of the car is reduced cor-
respondingly by the weight of the acces-
sory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load-
ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/
Summum equipment levels, as well as other
accessories such as Towbar, Load carriers,
Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps,
GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Car-
pets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer-
taining the kerb weight of your own partic-
ular car.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
For decal location, see page 286.
Max. total weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 75 kg.
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
11
290
Towing capacity and towball load
Engine Maximum weight, braked trailer (kg) Maximum towball load (kg)
1.6 1200 50
DRIVe 1300 75
D2 1300 75
2.0F 1350 75
2.0 1350 75
others 1500 75
Engine Maximum weight, unbraked trailer (kg) Maximum towball load (kg)
1.6, 2.0 and 2.0F 650 50
others 700 50
11 Specifications
Engine specifications
11
291
Overview
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Engine Engine
code
A
Output
(kW/rpm)
Output
(hp/rpm)
Torque (Nm/
rpm)
No. of
cylinders
Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Swept
volume
(litres)
Com-
pression
ratio
1.6 B4164S3 74/6000 100/6000 150/4000 4 79 81.4 1.596 11.0:1
2.0F B4204S4 107/6000 145/6000 185/4500 4 87.5 83.1 1.999 10.8:1
2.0 B4204S3 107/6000 145/6000 185/4500 4 87.5 83.1 1.999 10.8:1
T5 B5254T7 169/5000 230/5000 320/1500 – 5000 5 83 93.2 2.521 9.0:1
DRIVe D4162T 84/3600 115/3600 270/1750-2500 4 75 88.3 1.560 16.0:1
D2 D4162T 84/3600 115/3600 270/1750-2500 4 75 88.3 1.560 16.0:1
D3 D5204T5 110/3500 150/3500 350/1500-2750 5 81 77 1.984 16.5:1
D4 D5204T 130/3500 177/3500 400/1750-2750 5 81 77 1.984 16.5:1
A
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 286.
11 Specifications
Engine oil
11
292
Adverse driving conditions
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-
mally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Below are some examples of adverse driving
conditions.
Check the oil level more frequently for long
journeys:
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hot-
ter than +40 °C
The above also apply to shorter driving dis-
tances at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection
for the engine.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard to
service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service inter-
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-
ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
11 Specifications
Engine oil
11
293
Engine oil grade
Engine Engine code Recommended oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
1.6 B4164S3
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 5W–30
approx. 4.0
2.0F B4204S4 approx. 4.3
2.0 B4204S3 approx. 4.3
DRIVe D4162T approx. 3.8
D2 D4162T approx. 3.8
T5 B5254T7
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30
approx. 5.8
D3 D5204T5 approx. 5.9
D4 D5204T approx. 5.9
For filling engine oil, see page 222.
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
11
294
Overview
IMPORTANT
The recommended transmission fluid must
be used to prevent damage to the gearbox.
Do not mix with any other transmission fluid.
If the transmission is topped up with a dif-
ferent fluid, contact a workshop nearby for
servicing. Volvo recommends that you con-
tact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Gearbox oil
Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
IB5 2.1 BOT 130 M
B6 1.6
BOT 350M3MTX75 1.8
M66 1.9
Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
MPS6 7.3 BOT 341
AW55-51 7.7 JWS 3309
TF-80SC 7.0 AW1
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
11
``
295
Fluids
Fluid System Volume
(litres)
Recommended oil grade
Coolant 1.6 5.8
Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50% water
A
, see the packaging. The thermostat
starts opening at:
petrol engine (1.6) 82 °C
petrol engines 90 °C
diesel engines 82 °C
diesel engine (D2) 83 °C
2.0 and 2.0F 6.5
T5, automatic
gearbox
7.5
D2 and DRIVe 6.2
D3 and D4 8.5
Refrigerant Air conditioning
B
R134a (HFC134a)
Oil: PAG
Brake fluid Brake system 0.6 DOT 4+
Power steer-
ing fluid
Power steering 1.0 – 1.2 WSS M2C204-A or equivalent product with same specifications.
Washer fluid 4-cyl. Petrol/Die-
sel
4.0 Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during cold weather and below
freezing point.
5-cyl. Petrol/Die-
sel
6.5
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
11
296
Fluid System Volume
(litres)
Recommended oil grade
Fuel Petrol: 1.6, 2.0,
2.0F
approx. 55
Petrol: see page 147
Petrol: T5 approx. 62
Diesel: D2 and
DRIVe
approx. 52
Diesel: see page 148
Diesel: D3 and D4 approx. 60
A
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
B
Refrigerant quantity varies depending on engine variant. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the correct information.
11 Specifications
Fuel
11
``
297
CO
2
emissions and fuel consumption
A B C
2.0F
254 (242
A
) 10.9 (14.8
A
) 137 (135
A
) 5.9 (8.2
A
) 180 (174
A
) 7.7 (10.6
A
)
2.0 251 10.8 133 5.7 176 7.6
T5 315 13.5 151 6.5 211 9.0
DRIVe 112 4.3 92 3.5 99 3.8
D2 137 5.2 101 3.8 114 4.3
D3 183 7.0 106 4.0 134 5.1
D3 210 7.9 122 4.6 154 5.8
D4 183 7.0 106 4.0 134 5.1
D4 210 7.9 122 4.6 154 5.8
A
E85
11 Specifications
Fuel
11
298
: gram/km
: litre/100 km
A = urban driving
B = extra-urban driving
C = combined driving
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption and emission values in the
table above are based on specific EU cycles
1
,
that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic
version and without extra equipment. The car's
weight may increase depending on equipment.
This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded,
increases fuel consumption and carbon diox-
ide emissions.
There are several reasons for increased fuel
consumption compared with the table's val-
ues. Examples of this are:
The driver's driving style.
If the customer has specified wheels larger
than those fitted as standard on the mod-
el's basic version, then resistance increa-
ses.
High speed results in increased wind resis-
tance.
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
Even a combination of the above-mentioned
examples can result in significantly improved
consumption. For further information, please
refer to the regulations referred to.
Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise
in a comparison with the EU driving cycles
which are used in the certification of the car
and on which the consumption figures in the
table are based.
To bear in mind
Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce
consumption:
Drive gently and avoid unnecessary accel-
eration as well as braking too hard.
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results, see the tyre
pressure table on page 299.
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump-
tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from a
dealer.
See further information and more advice on
pages 13 and 144.
See page 146 for general information on fuel.
1
Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulation
no 692/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting
the engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - A car with a D2 engine and 6-speed manual
transmission with Start/Stop is started in 2nd gear. - The value for combined driving, which is given in the table, according to legislation, is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving.
CO
2
emission - to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions from the two driving cycles, the exhaust gases are collected. These are then analysed and give the value for CO
2
emissions.
11 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
11
``
299
Approved tyre pressures
Engine Tyre size Speed (km/h) Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load Max. load
Front (kPa)
A
Rear (kPa) Front (kPa) Rear (kPa)
ECO pressure
B
D2
DRIVe
195/65 R15
0–160 210 210 270 270 270
160+ 250 210 280 260 -
205/55 R16
0–160 210 210 250 250 250
160+ 250 210 280 260 -
205/50 R17
0–160 220 220 250 250 250
160+ 260 220 280 260 -
1.6
2.0
2.0F
195/65 R15
205/55 R16
0–160 210 210 250 250 250
160+ 250 210 280 260 -
205/50 R17
215/45 R18
C
0–160 220 220 250 250 250
160+ 260 220 280 260 -
T5
205/55 R16
0–160 210 210 250 250 250
160+ 260 210 280 260 -
205/50 R17
215/45 R18
0–160 220 220 250 250 250
160+ 270 220 290 270 -
11 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
11
300
Engine Tyre size Speed (km/h) Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load Max. load
Front (kPa)
A
Rear (kPa) Front (kPa) Rear (kPa)
ECO pressure
B
D3
D4
205/55 R16
205/50 R17
215/45 R18
0–160 230 220 250 250 250
160+ 270 220 290 270 -
Temporary Spare Tyre 0–80 420 420 420 420 -
A
In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
B
Economical driving, see page 198.
C
The 1.6 cannot be specified with this tyre.
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
are not always available in all markets.
11 Specifications
Electrical system
11
``
301
General
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
The electrical system is single-pole and uses
the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The battery capacity is dependent upon the
equipment level in the vehicle. If the starter
battery is replaced, therefore, you must ensure
that you switch to a battery with the same
capacity as the original battery (see the label
on the battery).
Battery
Voltage (V) Cold start capacity,
CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)
Reserve capacity
(minutes)
Capacity (Ah)
12
590 100 60
760
A
120 70
12
700
B
135 80
A
Cars equipped with High Performance audio system.
B
Cars equipped with diesel, keyless drive, Premium Sound audio system, fuel-driven heater or RTI.
Bulbs
Lighting Output (W) Type
Dipped beam, halogen 55 H7 LL
Main beam, halogen 55 H9
Extra main beam, Dual Xenon/ABL 55 H7 LL
Front direction indicators, halogen/Dual Xenon 21 PY21W LL
Front direction indicators, ABL 24 PY24W SV
11 Specifications
Electrical system
11
302
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Lighting Output (W) Type
Position/Parking lamps, front (Dual Xenon/halogen), Side marker lamps, front 5 W5W LL
Fog lamps 35 H8
Side direction indicators, door mirrors 5 WY5W LL
Front courtesy lighting 3 T10 Socket W2.1x9.5d
Glovebox lighting 3 T10 Socket W2.1x9.5d
Vanity mirror lighting* 1.2 Socket SV5.5 Length 35 mm
Cargo area lighting 10 Socket SV8.5 Length 43 mm
Number plate lighting 5 C5W LL
Rear direction indicators 21 PY21W LL
Position/Side marker lamps, rear 5 P21/5W LL
Reversing lamp, Rear fog lamp 21 P21W LL
11 Specifications
Type approval
11
303
Remote control key system
Country and
region
A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK,
E, EST, F, FIN, GB,
GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT,
LV, M, NL, P, PL, S,
SK, SLO
Delphi hereby
certifies that this
remote control key
system conforms to
the essential char-
acteristic require-
ments and other rel-
evant regulations of
directive 1999/5/EC.
IS, LI, N, CH
HR
ROK Delphi 2003-07-15,
Germany R-
LPD1-03-0151
BR
TW
ETC093LPD0155
Certification of the Keyless Drive
system
Siemens VDO Automotive A.G. hereby certifies
that this equipment type 5WK4 8952,
5WK48956, 5WK48812 conforms to the
essential characteristic requirements and other
relevant regulations of Directive 1999/5/EC.
11 Specifications
Symbols in the display
11
304
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
There are a variety of different symbols in the
display in the car. The symbols are divided into
warning, indicator and information symbols.
Shown below are the most common symbols
with their meanings and a reference to where
in the manual further information can be found.
For more information on symbols and text
messages, see pages 52 and 56.
- Red warning symbol, illuminates when
a fault has been indicated which could affect
the safety and/or driveability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown on the information
display at the same time.
- Yellow information symbol, illuminates
in combination with text in the information dis-
play, when a deviation in any of the car's sys-
tems has occurred. The yellow symbol infor-
mation can also illuminate in combination with
other symbols.
Symbols in the display
Indicator and warning symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Symbol Meaning Page
Warning 19, 30, 52, 55,
163
Information 52, 55, 163,
172, 174
Emissions
system
52, 53
Fault in the
ABS system
53, 54
Rear fog lamp 53
Symbol Meaning Page
Stability sys-
tem, DSTC*
53, 171, 172
Engine pre-
heater (diesel)
53
Low level in
fuel tank
53
Indicator
symbol for
trailer
54
Parking brake
applied
54
Airbags - SRS 19, 54
11 Specifications
Symbols in the display
11
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
305
Symbol Meaning Page
Low oil pres-
sure
52, 54
Seatbelt
reminder
16, 54
Alternator not
charging
54
Fault in brake
system
54, 169
Main beam
indicator
51
Symbol Meaning Page
Left direction
indicators
51
Right direc-
tion indicators
51
Other information symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Symbol Meaning Page
Rain sensor* 68
Cruise control* 70
Gear shift indicator* 159
Information symbols in the centre
console display
Symbol Meaning Page
G021216
Surround sound (only
Premium Sound)
257
G021221
News 261
G021222
Programme types 261
G021223
Regional radio pro-
grammes
262
Audio files 264
Directory in CD disc 264
G021220
Traffic information 261
Phone* 278
Bluetooth
TM
hands-
free*
278
11 Specifications
Symbols in the display
11
306
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Symbol Meaning Page
Seatbelt reminder 17
Airbag, passenger
seat, activated
22, 23
Airbag, passenger
seat, deactivated
23
11 Specifications
11
307
12 Alphabetical Index
12
308
A
A/C
electronic climate control..................... 99
manual climate control................... 94, 95
ABS fault............................................ 53, 169
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 61
Active headlamps...................................... 61
Adaptation............................................... 157
Additional heater (Diesel)......................... 104
Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 191
halogen headlamp.............................. 191
AF – automatic frequency update........... 262
Airbag........................................................ 20
activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 22
driver's and front passenger side......... 21
key switch off........................................ 22
AIRBAG ..................................................... 20
Airbag system............................................ 20
Air conditioning.......................................... 94
ECC...................................................... 97
general.................................................. 92
Air distribution.......................................... 100
ECC...................................................... 98
Air distribution, A/C................................... 95
Air quality system, ECC............................. 98
Air vents..................................................... 93
Alarm........................................................ 138
alarm indicator.................................... 138
alarm signals....................................... 139
arming................................................. 138
automatic alarm activation................. 139
deactivating a triggered alarm............ 139
disarming............................................ 138
RDS traffic warning............................. 261
reduced alarm level............................ 139
testing the alarm system.................... 139
Alcolock................................................... 150
Antenna location, Keyless drive............... 132
Approach light, duration.................... 79, 126
setting................................................... 84
Audio, see also Sound............................. 254
Audio volume
phone.......................................... 272, 280
phone/media player............................ 280
programme types............................... 263
ring signal, phone............................... 280
Auto
climate control settings........................ 97
AUTO
storing stations................................... 259
Auto climate............................................... 97
Automatic car washes............................. 210
Automatic gearbox
manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 160
towing and recovery........................... 178
trailer........................................... 182, 183
Automatic locking.................................... 135
Automatic relocking................................. 134
Autostart.................................................. 154
Auto volume control................................ 257
Auxiliary heater........................................ 104
Average fuel consumption......................... 65
B
Backrest
front seat, lowering............................. 109
Backrest rear seat, lowering.................... 118
Bag holder............................................... 123
Bass speaker........................................... 256
Battery............................................. 230, 301
changing the battery in the remote con-
trol key................................................ 133
maintenance............................... 219, 230
12 Alphabetical Index
12
309
overload.............................................. 145
specifications...................................... 301
start assistance................................... 181
symbols on the battery....................... 230
warning symbols................................. 230
Bioethanol E85........................................ 147
Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 175
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS 80, 175
Bluetooth
handsfree............................................ 278
mute microphone............................... 279
transfer call to mobile......................... 279
Bluetooth
media.................................................. 256
streaming audio.................................. 256
Bonnet, opening...................................... 220
Booster cushion
folding up.............................................. 37
lowering................................................ 38
Booster cushion, integrated...................... 37
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 226
Brake light.................................................. 63
Brakes
anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 169
brake light............................................. 63
Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 170
emergency brake lights...................... 170
handbrake............................................. 74
Brake system........................................... 169
Bulb holder
removal............................................... 237
Bulbs
changing............................................. 234
Bulbs, see Lighting.......................... 234, 301
C
Calls
functions during a call................ 271, 274
incoming............................................. 279
operation..................................... 271, 279
volume in phone................................. 272
Car care................................................... 210
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 212
Cargo area............................................... 120
cargo cover................................. 121, 122
lighting................................................ 112
loading................................................ 190
safety grille.......................................... 120
safety net.................................... 120, 122
Cargo cover..................................... 121, 122
Car settings............................................... 84
Car upholstery......................................... 212
Car wash.................................................. 210
Catalytic converter................................... 147
recovery.............................................. 178
CD discs
storage compartment......................... 116
CD functions............................................ 264
Checking and topping up the coolant..... 225
Checking the engine oil level................... 222
Checks
fluids and oils...................................... 222
Children..................................................... 31
child safety locks.......................... 38, 137
child seats and side airbags................. 24
location in the car................................. 31
location in the car, table....................... 32
safety.................................................... 31
Child safety locks.................................... 137
Child seat................................................... 31
Child seats................................................. 31
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. .. 38
12 Alphabetical Index
12
310
size classes for child seats with the ISO-
FIX fixture system................................. 39
upper mounting points for child seats.. 42
Cigarette lighter socket
front seat............................................... 58
Cleaning
automatic car washes......................... 210
car wash............................................. 210
rims..................................................... 210
seatbelts............................................. 213
upholstery........................................... 212
Climate control
general.................................................. 92
personal preferences............................ 83
Climate control settings
auto....................................................... 97
Clock, adjustment...................................... 83
Clutch fluid, checking & topping up........ 226
Coat hanger............................................. 115
Cold start................................................. 162
automatic gearbox.............................. 162
Collision
crash mode........................................... 30
inflatable curtain, IC.............................. 26
Colour code, paint................................... 214
Combined instrument panel...................... 51
Compass................................................... 77
calibration............................................. 77
setting the zone.................................... 77
Condensation in headlamps.................... 210
Coolant.................................................... 225
Cooling system........................................ 144
Crash, see Collision................................... 30
Cruise control............................................ 70
D
Deadlock
deactivation........................................ 135
temporary deactivation....................... 135
Deadlocks................................................ 135
Defroster.................................................... 95
Diesel....................................................... 148
Diesel: engine preheater............................ 53
Diesel particle filter.................................. 148
Dipstick, electronic.................................. 224
Direction indicators.................................... 64
Disc text................................................... 265
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 162
Display, messages..................................... 56
Display lighting.......................................... 61
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II............ 253, 257
Door mirrors............................................... 79
Driver's door control panel.................. 50, 75
Driving
cooling system.................................... 144
economical......................................... 144
in water............................................... 144
slippery driving conditions.................. 145
with trailer........................................... 182
Driving in water........................................ 144
Driving with a trailer
towball load........................................ 289
towing capacity.................................. 289
DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 171
DSTC, see also Stability system
symbol.................................................. 53
During a call, functions............................ 274
12 Alphabetical Index
12
311
E
ECC, electronic climate control................. 93
Economical driving.................................. 144
ECO pressure.......................................... 198
table............................................ 198, 299
Eco Start/Stop DRIVe.............................. 165
Electrical socket
cargo area........................................... 123
centre console...................................... 58
rear seat................................................ 58
Electrical system...................................... 301
Emergency calls...................................... 269
Emergency equipment
warning triangle.................................. 199
Emergency puncture repair..................... 203
Emission control
fault indicator........................................ 53
Engine block heater................................. 156
fuel-driven........................................... 101
Engine compartment............................... 220
coolant................................................ 225
oil........................................................ 222
power steering fluid............................ 227
Engine oil......................................... 222, 292
adverse driving conditions.................. 292
capacities........................................... 292
filter..................................................... 222
oil grade.............................................. 292
oil pressure........................................... 54
Engine specifications............................... 291
Entry, keyless............................................. 84
Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's
manual....................................................... 13
EON - Enhanced Other Networks............ 263
Equalizer.................................................. 257
Error messages in BLIS........................... 176
Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 17
External dimensions................................ 288
Extra mats................................................ 110
F
Fan
A/C........................................................ 94
ECC...................................................... 97
Fast-wind................................................. 265
First aid equipment.................................. 200
Flexifuel.................................................... 156
adaptation........................................... 157
Floor mats................................................ 110
Fluids, capacities..................................... 294
Fluids and oils.................................. 222, 294
Fluids and oils, checks, engine compart-
ment......................................................... 222
Fluids and oils general............................. 222
Fog lamps
rear........................................................ 61
Fog lamps, on/off...................................... 61
Fold down the rear seat backrest ........... 118
Frequency update, automatic.................. 262
Front seats, heated.................................... 95
FSC, environmental labelling..................... 13
Fuel
CO
2
emissions.................................... 297
consumption....................................... 297
fuel consumption, display..................... 65
fuel economy...................................... 198
fuel filter.............................................. 148
level indicator........................................ 53
parking heater..................................... 101
refuelling............................................. 146
12 Alphabetical Index
12
312
Fuses....................................................... 241
box in the engine compartment.......... 242
changing............................................. 241
general................................................ 241
relay/fuse box in the passenger com-
partment............................................. 246
G
Gearbox
manual................................................ 159
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 161
Geartronic................................................ 160
General information on fuel..................... 146
Glovebox................................................. 115
locking................................................ 128
Gross vehicle weight............................... 289
GSI - Gear selector assistance........ 159, 166
H
Handbrake................................................. 74
Hazard warning flashers............................ 73
Headlamp pattern adjustment
Active Bending Lights (ABL) .............. 191
Headlamps................................................. 60
Head restraint.......................................... 118
Heating
front seats....................................... 95, 99
rearview and door mirrors.............. 95, 99
rear window.................................... 95, 99
High-pressure headlamp washing............. 67
HomeLink
................................................ 86
Home safe lighting............................... 64, 79
setting................................................... 84
I
IDIS – Intelligent Driver Information Sys-
tem........................................................... 269
Ignition keys............................................. 155
IMEI number............................................ 274
Immobiliser...................................... 126, 155
Inflatable Curtain........................................ 26
Information display.................................... 56
Information on fuel................................... 146
Infotainment system
menus................................................. 252
Inlaid mats............................................... 110
Instrument lighting..................................... 61
Instrument overview
left-hand drive....................................... 46
right-hand drive.................................... 48
Integrated booster cushion........................ 37
Interior lighting, see Lighting................... 111
Interior rearview mirror............................... 77
automatic dimming............................... 77
Intermittent wiping..................................... 67
iPod, connection................................... 254
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats......... 38
J
Jack......................................................... 199
12 Alphabetical Index
12
313
K
Kerb weight.............................................. 289
Key
keyless lock and ignition system........ 130
remote control key.............................. 126
Key blade......................................... 127, 131
active locks......................................... 129
Keyless drive............................ 130, 158, 303
starting the car.................................... 158
Keyless entry............................................. 84
Keyless start (keyless drive)..................... 130
Keypad in the steering wheel...... 70, 72, 270
Key positions........................................... 154
Kick-down
automatic gearbox.............................. 161
L
Lambda-sond.......................................... 147
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 212
Lighting
Active Xenon headlamps...................... 61
approach light, duration............... 79, 126
automatic lighting............................... 112
automatic lighting, dipped beam.......... 60
bulbs, specifications........................... 301
cargo area........................................... 112
dipped beam........................................ 60
display lighting...................................... 61
front fog lamps..................................... 61
headlamp levelling................................ 60
home safe lighting.......................... 64, 79
in passenger compartment................. 111
lighting panel, passenger compart-
ment...................................................... 60
main/dipped beam......................... 60, 64
position/parking lamps......................... 60
reading lamps..................................... 111
rear fog lamp........................................ 61
Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 234
bulb holder, rear................................. 238
cargo area........................................... 239
dipped beam...................................... 235
direction indicators............................. 236
fog lamp.............................................. 237
front.................................................... 234
main beam halogen............................ 235
number plate lighting.......................... 239
parking lamps..................................... 236
position lamps.................................... 236
side marker lamps.............................. 237
vanity mirror........................................ 239
Loading
general................................................ 190
load capacity...................................... 190
load retaining eyelets.......................... 122
Load retaining eyelets.............................. 122
Locking.................................................... 131
unlocking............................................ 134
Locking/unlocking................................... 134
inside.................................................. 134
outside................................................ 134
Locks
locking................................................ 134
Lubricants................................................ 294
Lubricants, capacities.............................. 294
M
Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 60
Main beam
flashing................................................. 64
Main beam "flash"..................................... 64
Maintenance............................................ 219
rustproofing........................................ 215
self-maintenance................................ 219
Making calls..................................... 271, 279
12 Alphabetical Index
12
314
Manual gearbox....................................... 159
GSI - Gear selector assistance... 159, 166
towing and recovery........................... 178
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 160
Max. roof load ......................................... 289
Memory function in seats........................ 109
Menus
audio system...................................... 252
Menu structure.......................................... 83
media player....................................... 267
phone, menu options.......................... 276
phone, overview................................. 275
Messages in BLIS.................................... 176
Messages in the information display......... 56
Meters in the combined instrument panel
fuel gauge............................................. 51
outside temperature gauge.................. 51
speedometer......................................... 51
tachometer........................................... 51
trip meter.............................................. 51
Misting
attending to the windows..................... 92
condensation in headlamps............... 210
rear window.......................................... 95
removing with defroster function.... 95, 98
timer function.................................. 95, 98
Mobile phone
connect............................................... 280
handsfree............................................ 278
register phone..................................... 278
Mounting points (child seat)...................... 42
N
News........................................................ 261
O
Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 222, 292
Oil level low.............................................. 222
One-key dial............................................. 273
Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 13
Oxyhydrogen gas.................................... 181
P
PACOS....................................................... 22
PACOS, switch.......................................... 22
Paintwork
colour code......................................... 214
damage and touch-up........................ 214
Parking assistance................................... 173
parking assistance sensors................ 174
Parking brake....................................... 54, 74
Parking heater
battery and fuel................................... 101
general................................................ 101
parking on a hill.................................. 101
symbols and display messages.......... 102
time setting......................................... 103
Passenger compartment filter................... 92
Passenger compartment heater
fuel-driven........................................... 101
Personal preferences................................. 83
approach light, duration....................... 84
auto blower adjust................................ 83
automatic locking................................. 84
doors unlock......................................... 84
home safe lighting................................ 84
keyless entry......................................... 84
lock confirm. light................................. 84
recirculation timer................................. 83
unlock confirm. light............................. 84
Petrol grade............................................. 147
12 Alphabetical Index
12
315
Phone
calling from the phone book............... 273
connect............................................... 280
controls............................................... 270
entering text........................................ 272
handsfree............................................ 278
incoming calls..................................... 279
making calls........................................ 279
on/off.................................................. 271
one-key dial........................................ 273
phone book......................................... 281
phone book, shortcut......................... 281
receiving a call.................................... 279
register phone..................................... 278
standby, standby mode...................... 271
traffic safety........................................ 270
Phone book
handling numbers............................... 272
Phone system.......................................... 269
Pinch protection, sunroof.......................... 82
Polishing.................................................. 211
Power seat............................................... 108
Powershift gearbox.......................... 162, 178
Power steering fluid, checking and topping
up............................................................. 227
Power sunroof........................................... 81
Power windows......................................... 75
blocking................................................ 76
passenger seat..................................... 76
rear seat................................................ 76
Programme type...................................... 262
PTY – Programme type........................... 262
Puncture, see Tyres......................... 199, 201
Putting calls on hold................................ 271
R
Radio
EON.................................................... 263
frequency update................................ 262
news................................................... 261
programme types............................... 260
radio settings...................................... 259
radio stations...................................... 259
REG.................................................... 262
Radio text................................................ 262
Rain sensor................................................ 68
Random, CD and audio files.................... 265
RDS functions.......................................... 260
resetting.............................................. 263
Reading lamps, see Lighting................... 111
Rear seat ................................................. 118
Rearview and door mirrors
automatic retracting/extending...... 79, 84
compass............................................... 77
door...................................................... 79
electrically retractable........................... 79
interior................................................... 77
Recirculation
A/C........................................................ 94
ECC...................................................... 98
Recommended child seats ....................... 31
Reduced guard
settings................................................. 84
Refrigerant................................................. 92
Refuelling
fuel cap............................................... 146
fuel filler flap, electrical opening......... 146
refuelling............................................. 146
Refusing a call......................................... 271
REG - Regional radio programmes......... 262
Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 241
Remote control........................................ 126
replacing the battery........................... 133
Remote control, HomeLink
programmable ..................................... 86
12 Alphabetical Index
12
316
Remote control key................................. 155
battery replacement............................ 133
detachable key blade......................... 127
functions............................................. 126
Remote control key system, type appro-
val............................................................ 303
Resetting the door mirrors......................... 79
Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 159
Rims
cleaning.............................................. 210
Roof load, max. weight ........................... 289
Rustproofing............................................ 215
S
Safety
safety systems, table............................ 29
Safety grille.............................................. 120
Safety net......................................... 120, 122
Scan
CD and audio files.............................. 265
radio stations...................................... 260
Seatbelt
pregnancy............................................. 17
seatbelt tensioner................................. 18
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 17
Seatbelts.................................................... 16
Seats
head restraints, rear............................ 118
lowering the front backrest................. 109
lowering the rear backrest.................. 118
manual setting.................................... 108
power seat.......................................... 108
Service programme................................. 218
Side airbags............................................... 24
Side airbag SIPS........................................ 24
SIM card.................................................. 269
SIPS bags.................................................. 24
SMS......................................................... 274
read..................................................... 274
write.................................................... 274
Soot filter........................................... 56, 149
Soot filter full............................................ 149
Sound
audio settings............................. 254, 256
audio source....................................... 254
volume................................................ 254
Spare wheel............................................. 199
temporary spare......................... 197, 199
Spin control............................................. 171
SRS system
general.................................................. 20
Stability and traction control system....... 171
Stains....................................................... 212
Standby, phone....................................... 271
Start assistance....................................... 181
Starting the engine.................................. 154
keyless drive............................... 130, 158
Steering lock............................................ 154
Steering wheel
cruise control........................................ 70
keypad.................................... 70, 72, 270
steering wheel adjustment.................... 73
Stone chips and scratches...................... 214
Storage compartment.............................. 114
CD discs............................................. 116
Storage spaces in the passenger compart-
ment......................................................... 114
Storing stations, manual and automatic.. 259
Streaming audio...................................... 256
Subwoofer............................................... 256
Sunroof...................................................... 81
opening and closing....................... 81, 82
pinch protection.................................... 82
12 Alphabetical Index
12
317
sunscreen............................................. 82
ventilation position................................ 81
Sunscreen, sunroof.................................... 82
Surround.......................................... 253, 257
Symbols................................................... 172
indicator symbols........................... 53, 54
warning symbols................................... 52
Symbols and display messages
parking heater..................................... 102
T
Tailgate
driving with open tailgate................... 145
locking/unlocking........................ 126, 134
Tank volume............................................ 294
Technical data, engine............................. 291
Temperature
actual temperature............................... 93
passenger compartment, electronic cli-
mate control.......................................... 99
passenger compartment, manual cli-
mate control.......................................... 96
Testing the alarm system......................... 139
Timer
A/C........................................................ 95
ECC...................................................... 98
Tools........................................................ 199
Total airing function................................. 135
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 184
Towing..................................................... 178
towing eye.......................................... 179
Towing capacity....................................... 289
Towing equipment................................... 184
installation........................................... 186
removing............................................. 188
specifications...................................... 185
Towing eye.............................................. 179
TP – Traffic information............................ 261
Traffic information.................................... 261
Trailer....................................................... 182
cable................................................... 184
Trip computer............................................ 65
Tuning Radio............................................ 259
Type approval, remote control key sys-
tem........................................................... 303
Type designation..................................... 286
Tyres
direction of rotation............................ 197
driving characteristics......................... 194
general................................................ 194
maintenance....................................... 194
pressure...................................... 198, 299
puncture repair................................... 203
specifications...................................... 194
speed ratings...................................... 194
tread wear indicators.......................... 195
winter tyres......................................... 197
U
Unlocking......................................... 131, 134
settings................................................. 84
Upper mounting points, child seat............ 42
USB, connection...................................... 254
V
Ventilation.................................................. 93
Vibration damper..................................... 184
12 Alphabetical Index
12
318
Volume
audio system...................................... 254
auto volume control............................ 257
media player....................................... 254
W
Warning lamp
stability and traction control system. . 171
Warning symbol, airbag system................ 19
Warning triangle....................................... 199
Washer fluid, filling................................... 225
Washers
headlamps............................................ 67
rear window.......................................... 68
washer fluid, filling.............................. 225
windscreen........................................... 67
Water and dirt-repellent coating................ 80
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 211
Waxing..................................................... 211
Weights
kerb weight......................................... 289
Wheels
changing............................................. 201
installation........................................... 202
removal............................................... 201
rims..................................................... 196
snow chains........................................ 196
spare wheel........................................ 199
Whiplash injury.......................................... 27
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion................... 27
whiplash injury...................................... 27
Windscreen wipers.................................... 67
rain sensor............................................ 68
Winter tyres.............................................. 197
Wiper
rear window.......................................... 68
Wiper blades............................................ 228
cleaning.............................................. 228
replacing, rear window....................... 228
replacing, windscreen......................... 228
Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc51&OHMJTI"51SJOUFEJO4XFEFO(zUFCPSH$PQZSJHIU©7PMWP$BS$PSQPSBUJPO
12

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Volvo-V50---2012
6
  • De taal op mijn dashboard is frans, ik had deze graag veranderd naar het nederlands.
    Hoe kan ik dit wijzigen? Gesteld op 14-7-2016 om 19:08

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
    • dat kan de dealer. Ik weet niet waar je woont mar het is de moeite om naar Belgie te rijden.
      Wij hebben sinds een kleine week ook een v50 uit 2012 en ook frans dashboard.
      Wij hebben hier in de buurt de dealers gebeld en die vragen er €150 tot €200 voor en in Belgie hebben wij nog geen €35.- betaald. Geantwoord op 3-8-2016 om 21:38

      Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden
  • Beste,
    Wij wonen in België, in Oost-Vlaanderen.
    We zullen het mss eens aan een dealer in de buurt vragen. Geantwoord op 3-8-2016 om 21:43

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Volvo V50 - 2012 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Volvo V50 - 2012 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 8,98 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Volvo V50 - 2012

Volvo V50 - 2012 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 338 pagina's

Volvo V50 - 2012 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 340 pagina's

Volvo V50 - 2012 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 340 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info